www.carburetor-manual.com "The ABC's of Carburetion" Would you like some Free Manuals?

www.carburetor-manual.com "The ABC's of Carburetion" Would you like some Free Manuals?
www.carburetor-manual.com
Would you like some Free Manuals?
http://carburetor-manual.com/free-shop-manual-club-t-13.html
Also visit http://freeshopmanual.com for more Free Manuals
Also Visit my website for 7 FREE Download Manuals starting
with this one.
"The ABC's of Carburetion"
Click Here Now
file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/Tim/Desktop/carburetor-manual-welcome/index.htm[4/25/2009 11:42:20 AM]
2009 Pontiac Vibe Owner Manual
Seats and Restraints ......... 1-1
Front Seats
.................... 1-2
Rear Seats
.................... 1-7
Safety Belts
................... 1-8
Airbag System
.............. 1-21
Child Restraints ............. 1-36
Keys, Doors and
Windows ............................ 2-1
Keys
............................. 2-2
Doors and Locks
............ 2-6
Theft-Deterrent Systems
... 2-9
Windows
...................... 2-12
Mirrors ......................... 2-13
Sunroof ........................ 2-14
Storage .............................. 3-1
Storage
......................... 3-1
Instruments and
Controls ............................. 4-1
Instrument Panel
Overview
.................... 4-2
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators ............ 4-11
OnStar® System ............ 4-25
Lighting ............................. 5-1
Lighting
......................... 5-1
Infotainment ...................... 6-1
Audio System(s)
M
Jump Starting
............... 9-71
Towing
........................ 9-75
Appearance Care
.......... 9-83
............. 6-1
Technical Data ................. 10-1
Climate Controls ............... 7-1
Vehicle Identification
...... 10-1
Capacities and
Specifications
............ 10-2
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
..... 10-4
Climate Controls
............. 7-1
Driving and Operating ....... 8-1
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
............... 8-2
Driving Your Vehicle
...... 8-17
Fuel
............................ 8-36
Vehicle Service
and Care ............................ 9-1
Service .......................... 9-2
Owner Checks ................ 9-5
Headlamp Aiming
.......... 9-30
Bulb Replacement
......... 9-31
Electrical System ........... 9-35
Tires
........................... 9-41
Tire Changing
............... 9-61
Service and
Maintenance ..................... 11-1
Service and
Maintenance
.............. 11-1
Customer Information ...... 12-1
Customer Information
..... 12-1
Reporting Safety
Defects
................... 12-15
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy
............. 12-17
Index ....................................i-1
ii
Preface
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM
Emblem, PONTIAC, the PONTIAC
Emblem and the name VIBE
are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest
information at the time it was printed.
GM reserves the right to make
changes after that time without
further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited”
for Pontiac Division wherever it
appears in this manual.
Canadian Owners
This manual describes features
that may or may not be on
your specific vehicle.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
helminc.com
Read this manual from beginning to
end to learn about the vehicle’s
features and controls. Pictures,
symbols, and words work together
to explain vehicle operation.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer or from:
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès de
concessionnaire ou à l’adresse
suivante:
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25823089 B Second Printing
©
2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Preface
Index
To quickly locate information about
the vehicle use the Index in the back
of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
Cautions and Notices
A box with the word CAUTION is
used to tell about things that could
hurt you or others if you were to
ignore the warning.
{ CAUTION
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other people.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and
what to do to avoid or reduce the
hazard. Read these cautions.
A circle with a slash through it is a
safety symbol which means “Do Not,”
“Do not do this” or “Do not let this
happen.”
A notice tells about something that
can damage the vehicle.
iii
Notice: These mean there is
something that could damage
your vehicle.
Many times, this damage would not
be covered by the vehicle’s warranty,
and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the
damage.
There are also warning labels on
the vehicle which use the same
words, CAUTION or Notice.
iv
Preface
✍ NOTES
Seats and Restraints
Seats and
Restraints
Front Seats
Manual Seats .....................1-2
Seat Height Adjuster ...........1-2
Reclining Seatbacks ...........1-3
Passenger Folding
Seatback ...........................1-4
Head Restraints ..................1-6
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation ...........1-7
Safety Belts
Safety Belts ........................1-8
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly ..........................1-11
Lap-Shoulder Belt .............1-16
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy .......................1-19
Safety Belt Extender .........1-19
Safety Belt Check .............1-20
Care of Safety Belts .........1-20
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash ..............................1-20
Airbag System
Airbag System ..................1-21
Where Are the Airbags? ....1-23
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? ............................1-24
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? ............................1-26
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? ........................1-26
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates? ..........1-26
Passenger Sensing
System ............................1-28
Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ............................1-33
1-1
Adding Equipment to
Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ............................1-34
Airbag System Check .......1-35
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash .........1-35
Child Restraints
Older Children ..................1-36
Infants and Young
Children ..........................1-38
Child Restraint Systems ....1-41
Where to Put the
Restraint .........................1-43
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH) ..........................1-44
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash .........1-49
Securing Child Restraints
(Right Front Seat) ...........1-50
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seats) ...................1-53
1-2
Seats and Restraints
Front Seats
To move a manual seat forward or
rearward:
Seat Height Adjuster
Manual Seats
{ CAUTION
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver’s seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
Try to move the seat to be sure it is
locked in place.
The driver seat height adjuster is
located on the outboard side of the
seat. To raise or lower the seat,
pull up or push down on the lever
repeatedly until the seat is at
the desired height.
Seats and Restraints
Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver’s seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{ CAUTION
If the seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
1-3
{ CAUTION
Sitting in a reclined position when
your vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even if you buckle up,
your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be against your
body. Instead, it will be in front of
you. In a crash, you could go into
it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could go
up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your
safety belt properly.
1-4
Seats and Restraints
On vehicles with manual reclining
seatbacks the lever used to operate
them is located on the outboard
side of the seat.
To return the seatback to an upright
position:
1. Lift the lever fully, without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired
position, then release the lever to
lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Passenger Folding
Seatback
{ CAUTION
If you fold the seatback forward to
carry longer objects, such as skis,
be sure any such cargo is not
near an airbag. In a crash, an
inflating airbag might force that
object toward a person. This
could cause severe injury or even
death. Secure objects away from
the area in which an airbag would
inflate. For more information, see
Where Are the Airbags? on
page 1-23 and Loading the
Vehicle on page 8-32.
Seats and Restraints
{ CAUTION
Things you put on this seatback
can strike and injure people in a
sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
Remove or secure all items
before driving.
1-5
To fold the seatback down:
To raise the seatback:
1. Move the seat rearward.
1. Pull up on one of the levers
located on either side of the back
of the passenger’s seatback.
2. Lower the head restraint to the
lowest position and make sure
the seatback is at the most
upright position and locked.
2. Pull the seatback up and push it
back to lock it into place. Make
sure the safety belt is not twisted
or caught in the seatback.
3. Push and pull the top of the
seatback to be sure it is
locked into position.
On vehicles with this feature, the
seatback folds down to allow
for more cargo space. When the
area is not being used for more
cargo space or as a temporary table,
put the seatback in the locked,
upright position. Only adjust the seat
when the vehicle is not moving.
4. Use the reclining front seatback
lever to adjust the seatback to a
comfortable position.
3. Pull up on one of the levers
located on either side of the back
of the passenger seatback.
4. Fold the seatback down.
1-6
Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable
head restraints. The rear seats have
adjustable headrests in all seating
positions.
{ CAUTION
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal
injury in a crash. Do not drive until
the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull the head restraint up to
raise it.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of
the seatback, and push the
restraint down.
Seats and Restraints
Push down on the head restraint
after the button is released to make
sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not
designed to be removed.
Always raise the rear center head
rest at least one position when there
is a passenger seated there.
Active Head Restraint System
The vehicle has an active head
restraint system in the front seating
positions. These automatically tilt
forward to reduce the risk of
neck injury if the vehicle is hit
from behind.
1-7
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
You can fold either side of the
seatback down. The rear right side
seatback can also be used as a
temporary table while the vehicle is
stopped.
{ CAUTION
A rear seatback folded forward, or
any other object contacting or
pressing the front seatback may
affect the proper functioning of the
passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-28.
To fold either seatback down:
1. Move the front seat forward and
the seatback to the upright
position.
2. Move the headrests all the
way down.
3. Pull up on the lock release knob,
located on the top outboard side
of the seatback.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
4. Fold the seatback down.
1-8
Seats and Restraints
To raise the seatback:
1. Pull the seatback up and push it
back to lock it into place. The
safety belts should not be twisted
or caught in the seatback.
{ CAUTION
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts
are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
2. Push and pull the top of the
seatback to check that it is locked
into position.
{ CAUTION
If the seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
Safety Belts
This section of the manual describes
how to use safety belts properly.
It also describes some things not to
do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION
Do not let anyone ride where
a safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, the injuries can be
much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be
ejected from the vehicle. You
and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if
you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that
your passenger(s) are restrained
properly too.
Seats and Restraints
{ CAUTION
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that
is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 4-14 for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires
wearing safety belts. Here is why:
1-9
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
You never know if you will be in a
crash. If you do have a crash, you do
not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it is just a seat on wheels.
1-10
Seats and Restraints
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the
vehicle. The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until
stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as
the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
Seats and Restraints
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not. But
your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety
belt, even if you are upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag is
provided, all occupants still have
to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in
frontal collisions, but especially in
side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I
never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even
one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does not
protect you from things beyond
your control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within
25 miles (40 km) of home. And
the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at
speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-11
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety
belts and children. And there are
different rules for smaller children
and infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on
page 1-36 or Infants and Young
Children on page 1-38. Follow those
rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
1-12
Seats and Restraints
First, before you or your
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information
you should know.
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic
bones and you would be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force
on your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
Q: What is wrong with this?
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
protection this way.
Sit up straight and always keep
your feet on the floor in front of you.
The lap part of the belt should be
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously hurt if your
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
1-13
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously hurt if your
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap belt
and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The lap belt should
be worn low and snug on the
hips, just touching the thighs.
You can be seriously injured if
your belt is buckled in the wrong
place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there,
not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
not give nearly as much
protection this way.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
buckle.
1-14
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION
Q: What is wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured if
your belt goes over an armrest
like this. The belt would be much
too high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
Seats and Restraints
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously injured if you
wear the shoulder belt under your
arm. In a crash, your body would
move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and
neck injury. Also, the belt would
apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as
shoulder bones. You could also
severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-15
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too
far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
1-16
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
A: The belt is twisted across
the body.
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let
it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock
if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to
unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Seats and Restraints
1-17
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you.
See “Shoulder Belt Height
Adjustment” later in this section
for instructions on use and
important safety information.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
If the latch plate will not go fully
into the buckle, check if the
correct buckle is being used.
Pull up on the latch plate to make
sure it is secure. If the belt is
not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-19.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
1-18
Seats and Restraints
Adjust the height so that the
shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on the shoulder. The belt
should be away from the face and
neck, but not falling off of the
shoulder. Improper shoulder belt
height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a
crash.
Push down on the release button
and move the height adjuster to
the desired position. The adjuster
can be moved up by pushing on the
front of the height adjuster.
After the adjuster is set to the
desired position, try to move it
down without pushing the button
to make sure it has locked into
position.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for the front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety belts
during the early stages of a moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal
crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met.
And, if the vehicle has side impact
airbags, safety belt pretensioners
can help tighten the safety belts in a
side crash.
If the passenger sensing system
detects that there is not a passenger
in the right front passenger position,
the safety belt pretensioner for that
position will not activate. See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-28.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for your
safety belt system. See Replacing
Safety Belt System Parts After a
Crash on page 1-20.
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion
should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout
the pregnancy.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer/retailer will order
you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats.
To wear it, just attach it to the regular
safety belt. For more information, see
the instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
1-19
When a safety belt extender is
installed in the right front passenger
safety belt, make sure the passenger
airbag status indicator displays ON.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4-15. If the
indicator shows OFF, disconnect
the extender’s latch from the buckle
then reconnect the safety belt.
The passenger airbag status
indicator light should be ON and
then the safety belt extender can
be reconnected. If the safety belt
extender is used while the passenger
airbag status indicator light is OFF,
the right front passenger frontal and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
(if equipped) may not activate
correctly.
Always disconnect the extender
from the safety belt after you use
it so that the airbag will work
properly the next time someone
uses that seat.
1-20
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belt Check
Care of Safety Belts
Now and then, check the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts that might
keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to
have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 4-14 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Care of Safety Belts on
page 1-20.
{ CAUTION
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
If you do, it may severely weaken
them. In a crash, they might not
be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only
with mild soap and lukewarm
water.
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After
a Crash
{ CAUTION
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon
as possible.
Seats and Restraints
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies
that were used during any crash
may have been stressed or
damaged. See your dealer/retailer
to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
Airbag System
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at
the time of the crash.
The vehicle may have the following
airbags:
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in
a crash, or if the airbag readiness
light stays on after you start
the vehicle or while you are driving.
See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 4-14.
• A seat-mounted side impact
This vehicle has the following
airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front
passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.
airbag for the right front
passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the
right front passenger and the
passenger seated directly behind
the right front passenger.
1-21
All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached
label near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for
the driver and on the instrument
panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG
will appear on the side of the
seatback closest to the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear along the
headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force
of an inflating bag, all airbags
must inflate very quickly to do
their job.
1-22
Seats and Restraints
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
{ CAUTION
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, but do not replace them.
Also, airbags are not designed to
deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an
Airbag Inflate? on page 1-24.
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Airbags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge
of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Children who are up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults
and older children, but not for
young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read
how, see Older Children on
page 1-36 or Infants and Young
Children on page 1-38.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
Seats and Restraints
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4-14
for more information.
1-23
Where Are the Airbags?
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
The driver frontal airbag is in the
middle of the steering wheel.
The right front passenger frontal
airbag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger’s side.
If the vehicle has seat-mounted side
impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger, they are in the
side of the seatbacks closest to
the door.
1-24
Seats and Restraints
If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags for
the driver, right front passenger, and
second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side
windows.
{ CAUTION
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that
person causing severe injury or
even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
(Continued)
Do not use seat accessories
that block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds
are used to predict how severe a
crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain
the occupants.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
Whether the frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on
how fast the vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle
slows down.
CAUTION
(Continued)
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver or right
front passenger head and chest.
However, they are only designed
to inflate if the impact exceeds a
Frontal airbags may inflate at
different crash speeds. For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary
object, the airbags could inflate at
a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits an object that
does not deform.
Seats and Restraints
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object
(like a pole), the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object
at an angle, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended
to inflate during vehicle rollovers,
rear impacts, or in many side
impacts. Frontal airbags for the
driver and right front passenger
may also deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of the
vehicle such as hitting a curb, falling
into a deep hole, or landing hard.
In addition, the vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full
deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
The vehicle may have seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System on page 1-21.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended
to inflate in moderate to severe
side crashes. Seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags
will inflate if the crash severity
is above the system’s designed
threshold level. Your vehicle
has sensors which detect side
impacts. These sensors signal the
appropriate side impact airbag
to inflate. The threshold level can
vary with specific vehicle design.
1-25
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag is
intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck. A roof-rail
airbag is intended to deploy on the
side of the vehicle that is struck. It is
possible that, in a crash involving the
rear side of your vehicle, that only the
roof-mounted airbag will deploy.
In any particular crash, no one can
say whether an airbag should have
inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
For seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and
severity of the side impact.
1-26
Seats and Restraints
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills
the airbag causing the bag to break
out of the cover and deploy. The
inflator, the airbag, and related
hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel.
In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants
can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags,
there are airbag modules in the side
of the front seatbacks closest to
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules
in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Frontal
airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the
occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
But airbags would not help in many
types of collisions, primarily because
the occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an
Airbag Inflate? on page 1-24 for
more information.
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-26.
Seats and Restraints
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There
may be some smoke and dust
coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield
or being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
{ CAUTION
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
breathing problems but cannot get
out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by
opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors,
turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on
when the airbags inflate. You can
lock the doors, turn the interior
lamps off, and turn the hazard
warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields
are broken by vehicle deformation.
1-27
Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag inflates,
you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not
get them, the airbag system will
not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will
include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers
the need to replace other parts.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy on page 12-17 and Event
Data Recorders on page 12-17.
• Let only qualified technicians work
on the airbag systems. Improper
service can mean that an airbag
system will not work properly. See
your dealer/retailer for service.
1-28
Seats and Restraints
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front
passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be
visible in the instrument panel when
the vehicle is started.
whether the seat is occupied and/or
the weight of the occupant. If the
seat is unoccupied, the light will not
be visible after the system check.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4-15.
the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the
right front passenger frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags
and the roof-rail airbags are not
affected by the passenger sensing
system.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
The passenger sensing system will
also turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped), and
safety belt pretensioner if it detects
that there is no occupant in that
position.
The words ON and OFF will be
visible during the system check.
When the system check is complete,
either the word ON or the word
OFF will be visible depending on
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of
the right front passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including: an
infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
Seats and Restraints
{ CAUTION
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or
killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if
the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat
is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
andseat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped), no system is
fail-safe. No one can guarantee
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual
circumstance, even though
the airbag(s) are off.
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even if the
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back as
it will go. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) if:
• The right front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
• The system determines that an
infant is present in a rear-facing
infant seat.
1-29
• The system determines that a
small child is present in a child
restraint.
• The system determines that a
small child is present in a
booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes
his/her weight off of the seat for a
period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is
occupied by a smaller person,
such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
1-30
Seats and Restraints
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped), the off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that
the airbags are off. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on
page 4-15.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate) the
right front passenger frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) anytime
the system senses that a person
of adult size is sitting properly in
the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbags and
pretensioner to be enabled, the
on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbags and
pretensioner are active.
For some children who have
outgrown child restraints and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn
off the right front passenger frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped), depending
upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in the
vehicle who has outgrown child
restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
If the airbag readiness light and the
OFF light in the passenger airbag
status indicator come on together, it
may mean there is a malfunction in
the passenger sensing system.
Secure the child in the child restraint
in a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer/retailer.
{ CAUTION
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever
happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the
right front passenger’s seat may
not have the protection of the
airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 4-14 for more on
this, including important safety
information.
Seats and Restraints
If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint with
the ignition key in the ACC or
LOCK position while following the
directions provided by the child
restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing Child Restraints
(Right Front Seat) on page 1-50
or Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seats) on page 1-53.
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
recline the vehicle seatback
and adjust the seat cushion, if
adjustable, to make sure that the
vehicle seatback is not pushing
the child restraint into the seat
cushion.
6. Also make sure the child restraint
is not trapped under the vehicle
head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
See Head Restraints on
page 1-6.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure
the child in the child restraint in
a rear seat position in the vehicle,
and check with your dealer/retailer.
1-31
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
the right front passenger seat,
but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat.
1-32
Seats and Restraints
If this happens, use the following
steps to allow the system to detect
that person and enable the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped):
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the
on indicator is lit.
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger
in position on the seat during vehicle
maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system
maintain the passenger airbag
status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional
information about the importance of
proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion, or
aftermarket equipment such as
seat covers, seat heaters, seat
backpacks, and seat massagers
can affect how well the passenger
sensing system operates. We
recommend that you not use
seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment except when approved
by GM for your specific vehicle.
See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 1-34 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
The passenger sensing system may
suppress the airbag deployment
when liquid soaks into the seat.
If this happens, the off indicator
in the passenger airbag status
indicator and the airbag readiness
light will be lit. Have your
dealer/retailer check the system.
An object, person or child in the
rear seat contacting or pressing the
right front passenger seatback,
or objects stowed under the right
front passenger seat, may affect the
proper functioning of the passenger
sensing system.
When a safety belt extender is used
in the right front passenger seat,
make sure the passenger airbag
status indicator shows ON. If the
indicator shows OFF, disconnect the
extender’s latch from the buckle then
reconnect the safety belt.
Seats and Restraints
The passenger airbag status
indicator light should be ON and then
the safety belt extender can be
reconnected. If the safety belt
extender is used while the passenger
airbag status indicator light is OFF,
the right front passenger frontal and
seat-mounted side impact airbags (if
equipped) may not activate correctly.
{ CAUTION
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should
be serviced. There are parts of the
airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/
retailer and the service manual have
information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 12-16.
1-33
{ CAUTION
For up to 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off and the battery
is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close
to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are
probably part of the airbag system.
Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the
person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
1-34
Seats and Restraints
Adding Equipment to
Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to
or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that
change the vehicle’s frame,
bumper system, height, front end
or side sheet metal, they may
keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or
moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, front sensors, or
airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position,
which includes sensors that are
part of the passenger’s seat.
The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the
original seat trim is replaced with
non-GM covers, upholstery or
trim, or with GM covers,
upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such
as an aftermarket seat heater or a
comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the
seat fabric, could also interfere
with the operation of the
passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the
passenger sensing system from
properly turning off the passenger
airbag(s). See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-28.
If you have any questions, call
Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in
this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on
page 12-1.
Q: Because I have a disability,
I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on
page 12-1.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and
the service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
Seats and Restraints
Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance
or replacement. Make sure the
airbag readiness light is working.
See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4-14 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering
is damaged, opened, or broken,
the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any opened
or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag
module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? on page 1-26. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
1-35
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash
If an airbag inflates, you will need
to replace airbag system parts.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
{ CAUTION
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started
or comes on when you are driving,
the airbag system may not work
properly. Have the vehicle serviced
right away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 4-14 for more
information.
A crash can damage the
airbag systems in your vehicle.
A damaged airbag system may
not work properly and may not
protect you and your passenger(s)
in a crash, resulting in serious
injury or even death. To help
make sure your airbag systems
are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any
necessary replacements made
as soon as possible.
1-36
Seats and Restraints
Child Restraints
Older Children
booster. Use a booster seat with a
lap-shoulder belt until the child
passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on the
shoulder? If yes, continue. If no,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug
on the hips, touching the thighs? If
yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle’s safety belts.
The manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the booster seat, state the
weight and height limitations for that
• Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck.
The lap belt should fit snugly
below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in
a crash. It should never be worn
over the abdomen, which could
cause severe or even fatal
internal injuries in a crash.
Seats and Restraints
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system
secured in a rear seating position.
CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
(Continued)
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
{ CAUTION
1-37
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
(Continued)
1-38
Seats and Restraints
Infants and Young
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants
and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age
and size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in
every state in the United States and
in every Canadian province says
children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
{ CAUTION
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them.
Every time infants and young
children ride in vehicles, they should
have the protection provided by
appropriate child restraints. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people, or
can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Seats and Restraints
{ CAUTION
CAUTION
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg)
infant will suddenly become a
240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should
be secured in an appropriate
restraint.
1-39
(Continued)
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
{ CAUTION
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
(Continued)
1-40
Seats and Restraints
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle’s
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle
in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available.
When purchasing a child
restraint, be sure it is designed
to be used in a motor vehicle.
If it is, the restraint will have
a label saying that it meets
federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special
needs.
{ CAUTION
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not
fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant’s body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
{ CAUTION
A young child’s hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle’s regular
safety belt may not remain low
on the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
Seats and Restraints
1-41
Child Restraint Systems
(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A) provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
(C) Booster Seats
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child’s body
with the harness.
A booster seat (C) is a child
restraint designed to improve the fit
of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child
to see out the window.
1-42
Seats and Restraints
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
{ CAUTION
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-44 for more
information. A child can be
endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions that
come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around
in a collision or sudden stop
and injure people in the vehicle.
Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in the vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{ CAUTION
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly
following the instructions that
came with that child restraint.
Seats and Restraints
Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing
child is so great, if the airbag
deploys.
{ CAUTION
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or
killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if
the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is
in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
(Continued)
CAUTION
1-43
(Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag is
off. If you secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-28 for additional
information.
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study
the instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is
installed, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
1-44
Seats and Restraints
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around
in a collision or sudden stop
and injure people in the vehicle.
Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in the vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors
in the vehicle and attachments
on the child restraint that are made
for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use either
the lower anchors or the safety belts
to properly secure the child restraint.
A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether
and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in
the vehicle, you need a child restraint
has LATCH attachments. The child
restraint manufacturer provides
instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments
in the vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Lower Anchors
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are
two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
Seats and Restraints
Top Tether Anchor
A top tether (A, C) anchors the
top of the child restraint to the
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
The child restraint may have a single
tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Either
will have a single attachment (B) to
secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-45
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always
to be attached. In Canada, the law
requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that
the tether be attached. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions for
the child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a
top tether, one can be obtained,
in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer
whether or not a kit is available.
Rear Seat
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions
with two lower anchors.
1-46
Seats and Restraints
Accident statistics show that
children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than the
front seat. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 1-43 for additional
information.
To assist you in locating the lower
anchors, each seating position
with lower anchors has two labels,
near the crease between the
seatback and the seat cushion.
To assist you in locating the top
tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the cover.
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
The top tether anchors are located
on the floor of the rear cargo area.
Open the cover to access the
anchors. If the vehicle has a cargo
mat, you may need to fold it back
to access the top tether anchors.
Be sure to use an anchor located on
the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint
in a position without a top tether
anchor if a national or local
law requires that the top tether
be attached, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint
say that the top tether must
be attached.
{ CAUTION
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with the child restraint
and the instructions in this
manual.
Seats and Restraints
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Do not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment to
come loose or even break during
a crash. A child or others could
be injured. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, attach only one child
restraint per anchor.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
1-47
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position.
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower attachments
or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the
top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to the child restraint
manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
1-48
Seats and Restraints
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. If the vehicle has a cargo
mat, you may need to fold
it back to access the
top tether anchors.
2.3. Open the top tether anchor
cover to expose the anchor.
2.4. Route, attach, and tighten
the top tether according
to the child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and
you are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
Seats and Restraints
1-49
Replacing LATCH
System Parts After a
Crash
{ CAUTION
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and
you are using a dual tether,
route the tether around
the headrest or head
restraint.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you are
using a single tether, raise
the headrest or head
restraint and route the tether
under the headrest or head
restraint and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint, resulting
in serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure the
LATCH system is working
properly after a crash, see your
dealer/retailer to have the system
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH
system and it was being used during
a crash, new LATCH system
parts may be needed.
1-50
Seats and Restraints
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints
(Right Front Seat)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure
a forward-facing child restraint.
See Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-43.
In addition, your vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which
is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbag under certain
conditions. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-28 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 4-15 for more information,
including important safety
information.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or
killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the
right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is
in a forward position.
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag is
off. If you secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-28 for additional
information.
Seats and Restraints
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 1-44 for how to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child
restraint is secured in the seating
position using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-44 for top tether anchor
locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored,
or if the instructions that come with
the child restraint say that the
top strap must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether
be attached.
1-51
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal
and seat-mounted side impact
airbag, the off indicator on
the passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit
when you start the vehicle.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4-15.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions
of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint.
The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-52
Seats and Restraints
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator will come on
and stay on when the vehicle
is started.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-28 for more
information.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
Seats and Restraints
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seats)
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible
with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-44 for how to install the
child restraint using LATCH. If a
child restraint is secured in a seating
position using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-44 for top tether
anchor locations.
Do not secure a child restraint
in a position without a top tether
anchor if a national or local
law requires that the top tether be
anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint
say that the top strap must be
anchored.
1-53
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether
be attached.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be using
the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came
with the child restraint. Secure the
child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to
Put the Restraint on page 1-43.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and
run the lap and shoulder portions
of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint.
The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
If the latch plate will not go fully
into the buckle, check if the
correct buckle is being used.
Position the release button
on the buckle so that the safety
belt could be quickly unbuckled
if necessary.
1-54
Seats and Restraints
6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-44 for more
information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the
belt, and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child
restraint, it may be helpful to use
your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys, Doors and
Windows
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Keys
Windows
Keys ...................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System ...................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation ....2-4
Doors and Locks
Door Locks .........................2-6
Power Door Locks ..............2-7
Rear Door Security Locks ....2-7
Liftgate ...............................2-8
Theft-Deterrent Systems .....2-9
Immobilizer .........................2-9
Immobilizer Operation .........2-9
Content Theft-Deterrent .....2-10
Windows ...........................2-12
Power Windows ................2-12
Sun Visors ........................2-13
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ....2-13
Outside Power Mirror(s) ....2-14
Sunroof
Sunroof .............................2-14
2-1
2-2
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys
Do not do any of the following to
keys with a transponder:
• Cover the key.
• Hit the key hard against other
objects.
• Expose it to high temperatures
for a long time.
• Put the key in water.
• Use the key with electromagnetic
materials.
{ CAUTION
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key is used for the ignition,
doors, and all other locks.
The key number is on the tag
attached to the key ring. Keep this
tag and give it to your dealer/retailer
if a new key needs to be made.
If the vehicle has an Immobilizer
theft deterrent system, the key has
a transponder in the key that
matches a decoder in the vehicle.
See Immobilizer Operation on
page 2-9 for additional information.
Any new Immobilizer key must be
programmed before it will start
the vehicle. See your dealer/retailer.
If you make your own duplicate
key, you will not be able to cancel
the system or start the vehicle.
In an emergency, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 12-5
for more information.
Notice: If you ever lock your
keys in the vehicle, you may have
to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System
If this vehicle has the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) system,
it operates on a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
This device complies with
Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause
interference.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause
interference.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this
system by other than an authorized
service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
2-3
If there is a decrease in the
RKE operating range, try this:
• Check the distance.
The transmitter may be
too far from the vehicle.
Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a
few steps to the left or right,
hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check the transmitter’s battery.
See “Battery Replacement”
later in this section.
• If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer/retailer or a qualified
technician for service.
2-4
Keys, Doors and Windows
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter functions work up to
30 feet (9 m) away from the vehicle.
W (Unlock):
Press once to unlock
the driver door. If W is pressed
again within three seconds,
all remaining doors unlock. The
hazard warning flashers flash twice
to confirm that the door has
unlocked.
HOLD p (Panic): Press to arm
the alarm. The lights flash and the
horn sounds. The alarm turns
off when the ignition is shifted to
ON/RUN or HOLD p is pressed
again. The ignition must be in
LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY
for the alarm to work.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all of the
doors and liftgate.
The hazard warning flashers flash
once to confirm that the doors
have locked.
Programming Transmitters
to the Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to this vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased
and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the
replacement transmitter is
programmed to this vehicle, all
remaining transmitters must also be
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters will no longer work once
the new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to four
transmitters programmed to it.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Battery Replacement
The battery in the transmitter is
weak and should be changed if it
does not work at the normal range
in any location.
To replace the battery, use a flat,
thin non-metal object or
tape-wrapped metal object.
1. Separate the transmitter.
Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of the
circuitry on the transmitter.
Static from your body could
damage the transmitter.
3. Open the module cover.
4. Remove the old battery.
2. Remove the module.
2-5
2-6
Keys, Doors and Windows
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
CAUTION
• Young children who get into
{ CAUTION
5. Insert the new battery,
positive (+) side facing up.
Replace with a CR2025 or
equivalent battery.
6. Snap the module back together
and replace it in the transmitter.
7. Snap the front and back of the
transmitter together.
(Continued)
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not
open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash if the
doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock
the doors whenever you drive.
(Continued)
•
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by
extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even
death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this
from happening.
Keys, Doors and Windows
To lock and unlock your vehicle
from the outside, use your key or the
Remote Keyless Entry transmitter,
if equipped. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 2-4 for more information.
Open the driver door, on vehicles
with power door locks, by turning the
key in the lock toward the rear of
the vehicle.
Turn the key back toward the center
and toward the rear again, within
three seconds, to unlock all of
the doors. Use the key in the
passenger door to also unlock
all of the doors.
Lock a door by turning the key
toward the front of the vehicle.
If you have power door locks,
all the doors will lock.
To manually lock or unlock the door
from the inside, move the lever
on the door forward or rearward.
The driver and front passenger door
open from the inside while locked.
2-7
Rear Door Security Locks
Rear door security locks prevent
passengers from opening the
rear doors from the inside.
With manual locks, the key must be
used to lock and unlock the liftgate.
Power Door Locks
On vehicles with this feature, the
power door lock switch is located on
the armrest of the driver and front
passenger door.
Q:
K:
Press to lock all the doors.
Press to unlock all the doors.
Open the rear doors to access the
security locks.
To set these locks, slide the lever
down on each door and close it.
The doors can only be opened from
outside with the door unlocked.
To return the doors to normal
operation, slide the lever up.
2-8
Keys, Doors and Windows
Liftgate
CAUTION
{ CAUTION
It can be dangerous to drive with
the liftgate open because carbon
monoxide (CO) gas can come
into your vehicle. You cannot
see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other
cable connections must pass
through the seal between the
body and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows
are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating
or cooling system to its
highest speed and select the
(Continued)
•
(Continued)
control setting that will force
outside air into your vehicle.
See Climate Control System
on page 7-1.
If you have air outlets on or
under the instrument panel,
open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on
page 8-16.
Unlock and open the liftgate by
inserting the key, turning it
counterclockwise and raise it
by hand.
Close the liftgate by using the
handle to pull it down.
Lock the liftgate by inserting the key
and turning it clockwise to the
first position.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2-4
for more information.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Theft-Deterrent
Systems
Vehicle theft is big business,
especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features, however, they do not
make it impossible to steal.
Immobilizer
This device complies with
Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause
interference.
2-9
This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
Immobilizer Operation
1. This device may not cause
interference.
You do not have to manually arm or
disarm the system.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
The system is automatically armed
when the key is removed from
the ignition.
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
Changes or modifications to this
system by other than an authorized
service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
The security light, located on the
center of the instrument panel,
comes on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the
theft-deterrent system.
2-10
Keys, Doors and Windows
The security light flashes when the
system is armed.
If any of the following conditions
occur, contact your dealer/retailer.
When the key is inserted in the
ignition the transponder in the key
head transmits an electronic code
to the vehicle and automatically
cancels the system. Only the correct
key starts the vehicle.
• The security light stays on.
• The security light does not start
If the engine does not start, there
could be a problem with the
theft-deterrent system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and
the key appears to be undamaged,
try another ignition key. Check the
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 9-36.
If the engine still does not start with
the other key, the vehicle needs
service. If the vehicle does start, the
first key may be faulty. See your
dealer/retailer who can service the
theft-deterrent system and have
a new key made.
flashing when the key is
removed from the ignition.
• The security light flashes
Content Theft-Deterrent
This vehicle may have a
theft-deterrent system that activates
an alarm if attempts are made to
damage or break into the vehicle.
The alarm sounds and the lights
flash.
inconsistently.
See your dealer/retailer to have a
new key with a transponder made.
Bring the key and key number
with you.
In an emergency, contact Roadside
Assistance Program. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 12-5.
Do not leave the key or device
that disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
The security light is located on the
center of the instrument panel.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Arming the System
Disarming the System
To arm the system:
1. Close all the doors and the
liftgate.
To disarm the alarm do one of the
following:
• Unlock the doors with the key.
• Unlock the doors and liftgate with
the RKE transmitter.
• Start the engine.
2. Lock the doors and liftgate with
the key or Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
The security light comes on solid.
The system automatically arms
after 30 seconds. The security
light flashes when the system
is armed.
No one should be in the vehicle
when the alarm system is armed
because unlocking the vehicle from
the inside activates the system.
To avoid setting off the alarm make
sure all passengers are out of
the vehicle and the windows are
closed before arming the system.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the system as described
in the previous procedure.
The doors and liftgate should
be locked with the key or RKE
transmitter. Be sure to wait until
the security light starts flashing.
3. Unlock the driver door from the
inside. The system should
activate the alarm.
4. Stop the alarm as described in
the disarming procedure.
5. Repeat this operation for the
other doors. Also, check that
the system is activated when the
battery terminal is disconnected
and then reconnected.
2-11
If the system does not work
properly, have it checked by your
dealer/retailer.
How the System Alarm is
Activated
The system activates the alarm if:
• A locked door or the liftgate is
unlocked or opened without the
RKE transmitter.
• A locked door is unlocked or
opened without the key.
• The liftgate is unlocked or opened
with the key.
• The battery is reconnected.
• The side windows are tapped or
broken.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-12
Keys, Doors and Windows
Power Windows
Windows
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keys is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function and
they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a
closing window. Do not leave
keys in a vehicle with children.
Manual Windows
Turn the crank on the door to open
and close a manual window.
When there are children in the
rear seat use the window lockout
button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Keys, Doors and Windows
AUTO (Express-Down): Press all
the way down and release to lower
the driver window automatically.
Pull up at any time to stop the
window from lowering.
o
(Lock-Out): Press the lock-out
button, located on the driver
door, to disable the passenger
power windows and again to
enable them.
On vehicles with this feature, the
power windows only work when the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
in Retained Accessory Power
(RAP). See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 8-4.
Switches on the driver door control
the driver and passenger windows.
Each passenger door has a
switch to control that window.
Press or pull the front of a switch to
lower or raise a window.
Only the driver window can be
operated when the lock-out feature
is used.
Sun Visors
Pull the visor toward you or move it
to the side to help reduce glare.
To use the mirror, slide the attached
cover.
2-13
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Adjust the mirror to see clearly
behind the vehicle. Hold the mirror
in the center to move it up, down,
and side to side. The day/night lever
lets you adjust the mirror to avoid
glare from headlamps behind
your vehicle. Move the lever to the
right for nighttime use and back
to the center for daytime use.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three
control buttons located at the bottom
of the mirror. See OnStar® System
on page 4-25 for more information.
2-14
Keys, Doors and Windows
Outside Power Mirror(s)
The vehicle must be in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY to adjust
the mirrors.
1. Adjust either mirror by pushing
the selector switch to the L (left)
or R (right).
2. Use the arrows on the control
pad to adjust the direction of
the mirror.
3. Move the selector switch back to
the center. This locks the mirrors
in place.
The controls are located to
the left of the steering wheel
on the instrument panel.
Manually fold the mirrors inward
to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
To fold, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return to its original position.
Sunroof
On vehicles with a sunroof,
the controls are on the overhead
console. The ignition must be
in ON/RUN or Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) for the sunroof
to work.
TILT: Slide the sunshade back.
Press to tilt the sunroof. Press again
to stop movement at any time.
DOWN: Press to lower the sunroof.
SLIDE: Press to open the sunroof.
It express opens and stops
before the fully open position.
Press again to fully open. Press
the switch at any time to stop the
sunroof from moving. If the sunshade
is closed it opens with the sunroof.
Keys, Doors and Windows
CLOSE: Press to express close
the sunroof. Press again to
stop movement at any time.
The sunshade must be closed
by hand.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If there is an obstruction when the
sunroof is closing, it stops and
partly opens again. Remove the
obstruction and press the button
again to close the sunroof.
2-15
2-16
Keys, Doors and Windows
✍ NOTES
Storage
Storage
3-1
Storage
Glove Box
Storage
Glove Box ..........................3-1
Cupholders .........................3-1
Overhead Console ..............3-2
Center Console Storage .....3-2
Luggage Carrier ..................3-2
Driver Storage
Compartment ....................3-3
Floor Mats ..........................3-3
Hooks .................................3-3
Cargo Cover .......................3-4
Cargo Tie Downs ...............3-6
Cargo Management
System .............................3-6
Lift up on the glovebox lever to
open it.
Cupholders
There are cupholders located in
the console area between the
front seats.
There are also cupholders that fold
out from the back of the center
console.
There are also molded bottle
holders located in the front and
rear doors.
The cupholder size can be adjusted
by changing the location of the
provided insert.
3-2
Storage
Overhead Console
If your vehicle has an overhead
console, push on the cover to
open it.
Center Console Storage
To access the center console
storage area, pull up on the lock
release lever to raise the upper
cover and access the tray storage.
Pull up on the lower release
lever to raise the tray and access
more storage.
Luggage Carrier
{ CAUTION
If something is carried on top of
the vehicle that is longer or wider
than the luggage carrier — like
paneling, plywood, or a
mattress — the wind can catch it
while the vehicle is being driven.
This can cause a driver to lose
control. The item being carried
could be violently torn off, and
this could cause a collision, and
damage the vehicle. Items may
be carried inside. Never carry
something longer or wider than
the luggage carrier on top of the
vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle
capacity when loading your vehicle.
For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading
the Vehicle on page 8-32.
Notice: Loading cargo on the
luggage carrier that weighs more
than 132 lbs (60 kg) or hangs
over the rear or sides of the
vehicle may damage your vehicle.
Load cargo so that it rests
evenly between the crossrails,
making sure to fasten it securely.
To prevent damage or loss of
cargo as you are driving, check
to make sure the luggage carrier
and cargo are still securely fastened.
Storage
Loading cargo on the roof rack will
make the center of the vehicle gravity
higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden
starts, sharp turns, sudden braking
or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it
may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover due to failure to
operate the vehicle correctly.
Floor Mats
If driving for a long distance, on
rough roads, or at high speeds, stop
the vehicle now and then during
the trip to make sure the cargo
remains in its place.
How to Remove and Replace
the Floor Mat
The driver side floor mat is held in
place by two locator hooks.
The floor mat must be properly
placed on the floor so that it does
not block the movement of the
accelerator pedal.
To reinstall the floor mat, line up
the openings in the floor mat
over the locator hooks and push
down into place.
Hooks
There are hooks for hanging items
in the cabin, luggage compartment,
and in the cargo management
system, if the vehicle has one.
On the front passenger side,
press the hook to open and
use it. There is a weight limit of
44 lb (20 kg).
Driver Storage
Compartment
The driver storage compartment is
located near the left side of the
steering column on the bottom of
the instrument panel. Pull up on the
lever to open the cover.
3-3
The luggage compartment hooks
should only be used to hang
items under 7 lb (3 kg).
To remove the floor mat, pull up on
the rear of the mat to disconnect
it from the locator hooks.
For vehicles with a cargo
management system, open the
deck lid to hang items under
5 lb (2.3 kg).
3-4
Storage
Cargo Cover
Folding the Cargo Cover:
For vehicles equipped with a cargo
cover.
1. Hold the cargo cover with
both hands.
Using the cargo cover:
1. Remove the cargo cover from its
storage location.
2. Unfold the cargo cover.
4. Attach the center hook to the
center head restraint.
{ CAUTION
3. Attach the hooks to the indented
slots on the sides of the rear
cargo area.
An improperly stored cargo cover
could be thrown about the vehicle
during a collision or sudden
maneuver. Someone could be
injured. If the cover is removed,
always store it in the proper
storage location. When it is
replaced, always be sure that
it is securely reattached.
2. Bend one side of the cover
toward the body.
Storage
3. Twist the other side in the
opposite direction.
4. Make a small circle, and then
fold the cover inward.
5. Make sure the cover’s three
circles are side by side.
6. Return the cover to its
storage bag.
3-5
3-6
Storage
Cargo Tie Downs
There are also hooks on the inside
cover to hold items.
The cargo tie down straps and
hooks are intended to be used to
secure a flat tire or other items.
The tie down hooks are located in
the rear cargo area. The straps
are under the rear floor panel.
Additional storage is available on
both sides of the cargo management
system. Turn the knobs to the
UNLOCK position, and remove
the deck boards to access the
storage area.
To use, hook the end of the straps
to the hooks in a criss-cross
pattern. Pull on the straps at the
buckle to tighten as needed.
To use:
Cargo Management
System
A cargo management system,
for vehicles that have it, can be
used for organizing and separating
items in the rear of the vehicle.
1. Open the cover.
2. Unfold the side panels out and
lock them into place to hold up
the cover.
3. Hook the nets into the cover
slots on the lid to use as
dividers.
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and
Controls
Power Outlet 115 Volt
Alternating Current ..........4-10
Ashtray(s) .........................4-10
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
Instrument Panel
Overview
Instrument Panel
Overview ...........................4-2
Hazard Warning Flashers ....4-3
Horn ...................................4-3
Tilt Wheel ...........................4-4
Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever ................................4-4
Cruise Control ....................4-4
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals .............................4-7
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer ..........4-7
Flash-to-Pass ......................4-7
Windshield Wipers ..............4-7
Windshield Washer .............4-8
Rear Window Wiper/
Washer .............................4-8
Accessory Power
Outlet(s) ............................4-9
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators .................4-11
Instrument Panel Cluster ...4-12
Speedometer and
Odometer ........................4-13
Trip Odometer(s) ...............4-13
Tachometer .......................4-13
Safety Belt Reminders ......4-14
Airbag Readiness Light .....4-14
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator ..........................4-15
Service Airbag Notification
System Message .............4-16
Charging System Light ......4-16
Brake System Warning
Light ................................4-17
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light .......4-18
Speed Sensitive Power
Steering (SSPS)
Warning Light ..................4-18
4-1
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light ..................4-18
Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning Light .......4-19
StabiliTrak® Indicator
Light ................................4-19
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage ..........4-19
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp ................4-20
Security Light ....................4-22
Oil Pressure Light .............4-22
Fog Lamp Light ................4-23
Lights On Reminder ..........4-23
Taillamp Indicator Light .....4-23
Cruise Control Light ..........4-23
Low Washer Fluid
Warning Light ..................4-23
Service All-Wheel Drive
Light ................................4-24
Highbeam On Light ...........4-24
Door Ajar Light .................4-24
Fuel Gage ........................4-24
Low Fuel Warning Light ....4-25
OnStar® System
OnStar® System ................4-25
4-2
Instruments and Controls
Instrument Panel Overview
Instruments and Controls
The main components of the
instrument panel are the following:
A. Outside Power Mirror(s) on
page 2-14.
B. Outlet Adjustment on page 7-3.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 4-4.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster on
page 4-12.
E. Windshield Wipers on page 4-7.
F. Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator. Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-28.
Security Light. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-10.
G. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4-3.
H. Audio System(s) on page 6-1.
I. Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8-21.
J. Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 2-10.
K. Driver Storage Compartment
on page 3-3.
L. Hood Release on page 9-5.
M. Audio Steering Wheel Controls
on page 6-13.
N. Tilt Wheel on page 4-4.
O. Horn on page 4-3.
P. Cruise Control on page 4-4
(If Equipped).
Q. Ignition Positions on page 8-2.
R. Tire Pressure Reset Button
(Out of View). See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 9-50.
S. Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current on page 4-10 On/Off
Button.
T. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped)
or Accessory Power Outlet.
Ashtray(s) on page 4-10
or Accessory Power Outlet(s)
on page 4-9.
U. Shift Lever. Automatic
Transmission Operation
(Four Speed) on page 8-6 or
Automatic Transmission
Operation (Five Speed)
on page 8-8 or Manual
Transmission Operation
on page 8-11.
4-3
V. Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current on page 4-10.
W. Climate Control System on
page 7-1.
X. Hooks on page 3-3.
Y. Glove Box on page 3-1.
Hazard Warning Flashers
| (Hazard Warning Flasher):
Press this button located on
the instrument panel, to make the
front and rear turn signal lamps flash
on and off. This warns others that
you are having trouble.
Press | again to turn the
flashers off.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols
on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
4-4
Instruments and Controls
Tilt Wheel
A tilt and telescope wheel lets the
steering wheel position be adjusted.
Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever
The lever on the left side of the
steering column includes the
following:
O : Exterior Lamps.
G : Turn and Lane-Change
The adjustment lever is located
on the left side of the steering
column.
Signals.
2 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer.
Pull the lever down to move the
steering wheel up or down and in or
out. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Flash-to-Pass Feature.
Do not adjust the tilt and telescope
lever while driving.
Information for these features is on
the pages following.
#:
Fog Lamps (If Equipped).
Cruise Control
For vehicles with cruise control, the
lever is located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
Cruise control, lets a speed of
25 mph (40 km/h) or more be
maintained without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Instruments and Controls
{ CAUTION
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
{ CAUTION
If you leave your cruise control on
when you are not using cruise,
you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to
use cruise control.
1. Press the ON-OFF button at the
end of the lever. The CRUISE
light on the instrument panel
cluster comes on. See Cruise
Control Light on page 4-23.
2. Get to the desired speed.
3. Move the lever down to −SET
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
4-5
If the cruise control indicator light
flashes, press the ON-OFF button
once to deactivate the system, and
then press the button back on.
If the cruise control speed cannot be
set or the cruise control cancels
immediately after being activated,
there may be a problem with the
cruise control system. See your
dealer/retailer.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the brakes are applied after the
cruise control is set, the cruise
control is turned off.
If the vehicle speed is 25 mph
(40 km/h) or greater, push the lever
up to +RES (Resume/Accelerate)
to return to the previously set speed.
4-6
Instruments and Controls
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are three ways to increase
the vehicle speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get
to the higher speed. Move the
lever down to −SET. Release the
lever and the accelerator pedal.
There are two ways to reduce the
vehicle speed while using cruise
control:
• Move the cruise lever up
• To slow down in very small
to +RES. Hold it there until the
desired speed is reached,
and then release the lever.
• To increase the vehicle speed in
very small amounts, move the
lever to +RES briefly and then
release it. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.
• Push and hold the lever to −SET
until the desired lower speed is
reached, then release it.
amounts, push the lever
down briefly. Each time this
is done, the vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle speed.
When you take your foot off the
pedal, the vehicle slows down to
the cruise control speed set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
The cruise control performance will
vary depending upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills.
When going up steep hills, you might
have to step on the accelerator pedal
to maintain the vehicle speed.
When going downhill, you might
have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep the vehicle speed down.
Applying the brake or downshifting
to 2 SECOND or L LOW turns
off the cruise control.
Ending Cruise Control
There are several ways to turn off
the cruise control:
• Step on the brake pedal or push
the clutch pedal, if the vehicle
has a manual transmission.
• Press the ON-OFF button.
• Pull the cruise control lever
toward you.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory
is erased when the cruise control or
the ignition is turned off.
Instruments and Controls
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
4-7
Windshield Wipers
The headlamps must be on for this
feature to work.
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Hold it there until the
lane change is completed.
The lever returns to its starting
position whenever it is released.
If after signaling a turn or a
lane change the arrow flashes
rapidly or does not come on,
a signal bulb may be burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 9-36.
Push the turn signal lever away
from you to turn the high beams on.
This instrument panel cluster light
3 comes on while the high beam
headlamps are on.
Pull the lever towards you to return
to low beams.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature is used to signal to the
vehicle ahead that you want to pass.
With the lever in the low-beam
position, pull the lever toward you to
momentarily switch to high-beams.
If the headlamps are on when the
lever is released, the high-beams will
return to low-beam.
The windshield wiper/washer lever
is located on the right side of
the steering column.
Move the lever to one of the
following positions:
z (Mist): Move the lever to mist,
for a single wiping cycle and then
release. The wipers stop after
one wipe.
( (Off):
Move the lever to this
position to turn the wipers off.
4-8
Instruments and Controls
& (Intermittent): Move the lever
to choose a delayed wiping cycle.
For vehicles with the variable
intermittent feature, the time
between wipes can be adjusted.
Turn the & band for a longer
or shorter delay interval.
q (Low): Use for steady wiping at
low speed.
l (High):
Use for steady wiping at
high speed.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper
blades before using them. If the
blades are frozen to the windshield,
loosen or thaw them. If they
become damaged, get new blades
or blade inserts. See Windshield
Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 9-25.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wipers. A circuit breaker stops
them until the motor cools.
Windshield Washer
Pull the lever toward you to spray
washer fluid on the windshield.
The spray continues until the lever
is released. The wipers will run
a few times. See Windshield Washer
Fluid on page 9-24 for information
on filling the windshield washer fluid
reservoir.
{ CAUTION
In freezing weather, do not use
your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
Rear Window
Wiper/Washer
Z Rear Wiper: Turn the end of
the lever to low or high, to turn
on the rear window wiper.
y (Low): For steady rear wiping at
low speed.
x (High): For steady rear wiping
at high speed.
= (Rear Washer): Turn the end
of the lever up or down as far
as it will go, to squirt washer fluid
on the rear window. The knob
automatically returns from these
positions after it is released.
The windshield washer reservoir is
used for the windshield and the
rear window. Check the fluid level
in the reservoir if either washer
is not working. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 9-24.
Instruments and Controls
{ CAUTION
In freezing weather, do not use
your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
Accessory Power
Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in auxiliary electrical
equipment.
The vehicle has an accessory
power outlet on the center floor
console below the shift lever.
To use the outlet, the ignition
must be in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Pull down the
small cover to access the outlet.
Notice: Leaving electrical
equipment on for extended
periods will drain the battery.
Always turn off electrical
equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum amperage
rating.
This circuit is protected by a fuse
and has a maximum current level.
Do not use equipment exceeding
the maximum amperage rating.
Certain power accessory plugs may
not be compatible to the power
accessory outlet and could result
in a blown vehicle or adapter
fuse. See your dealer/retailer for
additional information on the power
accessory plugs.
4-9
Notice: Adding any electrical
equipment to the vehicle can
damage it or keep other
components from working as
they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage
rating of 20 amperes. Check
with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included
with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage
not covered by the warranty.
Do not hang any type of
accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
4-10
Instruments and Controls
Power Outlet 115 Volt
Alternating Current
Electrical equipment with a
maximum limit of 115 VAC can be
plugged into this power outlet. If the
equipment used requires more than
the limit, a protection circuit will
cut the power supply. The power
automatically restarts when
equipment that operates within
the limit is plugged in.
An indicator light in the button
comes on. After using the outlet,
press the button again to turn it off.
The power outlet is not designed for
the following electrical equipment
and they may not work properly:
• Equipment with high initial peak
wattage: cathode-ray tube type
televisions, compressor-driven
refrigerators, or electric
power tools.
The power outlet is located below
the shift lever.
Before using the outlet, turn on
the ignition and press the button
located on the instrument panel
below the climate control system.
• Other equipment requiring an
extremely stable power supply:
microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch sensor
lamps, etc.
Ashtray(s)
For vehicles with a removable
ashtray, it is located in the front
cupholder in the center console
storage area.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other
flammable items are put in
the ashtray, hot cigarettes or
other smoking materials could
ignite them and possibly damage
the vehicle. Never put flammable
items in the ashtray.
For vehicles with a lighter, push
the lighter down and it will pop up
when it is ready to be used.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position to use the lighter.
Instruments and Controls
Notice: Holding a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating does
not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating can
occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown.
Do not hold a cigarette lighter in
while it is heating.
It is not recommended to use the
cigarette lighter to plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment. Use the
accessory power outlet for phones
and other electrical equipment.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s)
on page 4-9 or Power Outlet
115 Volt Alternating Current
on page 4-10.
Warning Lights,
Gages, and Indicators
Warning lights and gages can
signal that something is wrong
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gages could
prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there
may be or is a problem with one
of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when
the engine is started to indicate
they are working.
4-11
Gages can indicate when there may
be or is a problem with one of the
vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to
indicate a problem with the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be
costly and even dangerous.
4-12
Instruments and Controls
Instrument Panel Cluster
This feature is designed to show at a glance how the vehicle is running. It shows vehicle speed, how much fuel is
left in the fuel tank and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.
United States Base Cluster shown, Canada similar
Instruments and Controls
Speedometer and
Odometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed in both miles per hour (mph)
and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven.
If the vehicle needs a new odometer
installed, the new one must be
set to the mileage total of the old
odometer. If it cannot be reset, then
it must be set at zero and a label
put on the driver door to show
the old mileage reading when the
new odometer was installed.
See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
4-13
Trip Odometer(s)
Temperature Display
The trip odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven since the trip
odometer was last set to zero.
The outside air temperature is
displayed on the center of the
instrument panel, within the trip
odometer. The display shows
the outside air temperature in
Fahrenheit with a range from
−40°F to 122°F (−40°C to 50°C).
The button located above the
odometer allows switching between
the odometer and the trip odometer.
To set the trip odometer to zero,
press and hold the button.
Tachometer
The tachometer shows engine
speed in thousands of revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice: If the engine is operated
while the tachometer is in the
shaded warning area, the vehicle
could be damaged, and the
damages would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
4-14
Instruments and Controls
Safety Belt Reminders
When the engine is started, a chime
will sound for several seconds to
remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver safety
belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will also flash
until the driver belt is buckled. If the
driver belt is already buckled, neither
the chime nor the light comes on.
The vehicle also has a safety belt
reminder light for the right front
passenger position next to the
passenger airbag status indicator.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4-15.
This light is located on the center of
the instrument panel, next to the
audio system.
When the key is turned to ON/RUN
or START, this light comes on
as a reminder for the right front
passenger to fasten their safety belt.
This light flashes until the right
front passenger safety belt is
buckled. The passenger safety belt
reminder light will not come on if
the right front passenger belt
is already buckled or if a sensor
does not detect the weight of
a passenger in that seat.
If something is placed on the right
front passenger seat, the sensors
in the seat may detect that
object and cause the right front
passenger safety belt reminder
light to come on. If this happens,
remove the object.
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light stays on if there is an
electrical problem. The system
monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors,
seat-mounted side impact and
roof-mounted airbag sensors, driver
seat position sensor, driver seat
belt buckle switch, right front
occupant sensing system and
indicator light, front passenger
seat belt buckle switch, seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, inflators,
interconnecting wiring and power
sources. For more information
on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 1-21.
Instruments and Controls
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
This light will come on briefly when
the vehicle is started, then it should
go out indicating the system is ready.
{ CAUTION
If the airbag readiness light stays
on or keeps flashing after you
start your vehicle, it means the
airbag system and safety belt
pretension system may not be
working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have
your vehicle serviced right away if
the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle.
The vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-28
for important safety information.
The instrument panel has a
passenger airbag status indicator.
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF for several
seconds as a system check.
Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light
either ON or OFF if there is weight
on the seat, to let you know the
4-15
status of the right front passenger
frontal and seat-mounted side
impact airbags (if equipped).
If the seat is unoccupied, the light
will not be visible after the system
check.
If the word ON is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator,
it means that the right front
passenger frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbags (if equipped)
are enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it
means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped). See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-28 for
more on this, including important
safety information.
4-16
Instruments and Controls
If, after several seconds, all status
indicator lights remain on, there
may be a problem with the lights or
the passenger sensing system.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
{ CAUTION
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever
happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the
right front passenger’s seat may
not have the protection of the
airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 4-14 for more on
this, including important safety
information.
Service Airbag
Notification System
Message
If the Service Airbag Notification
System message appears on the
radio display, the vehicle may not
be able to provide the Automatic
Notification of Airbag Deployment
feature. See OnStar® System on
page 4-25 for information on this
feature. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
Charging System Light
The charging system light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned
on, but the engine is not running,
as a check to show the light is
working. It should go out when the
engine is started.
If the light stays on, or comes on
while driving, there could be a
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your
dealer/retailer. Driving while this light
is on could drain the battery.
If a short distance must be driven
with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the
radio and air conditioner.
Instruments and Controls
Brake System Warning
Light
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake
system is divided into two parts.
If one part is not working, the other
part can still work and stop the
vehicle. For good braking both parts
need to be working well.
If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away.
If it does not come on, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light also comes
on when the parking brake is
set. The light will stay on if the
parking brake does not fully release.
If it stays on after the parking
brake is fully released, it means
there is a brake problem.
4-17
{ CAUTION
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the
vehicle has been pulled off the
road and carefully stopped, have
the vehicle towed for service.
See Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light later in this section
and Towing Your Vehicle on
page 9-75.
United States
Canada
If the vehicle has anti-lock brakes,
this light should come on when
the key is turned to START.
4-18
Instruments and Controls
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
United States
Canada
The ABS warning light comes on
briefly when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN. This is normal.
If the light does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready
to warn you if there is a problem.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF. If the light comes
on while driving, stop as soon
as possible and turn the ignition off.
Then start the engine again to
reset the system. If the light
still stays on, or comes on again
while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, there are
still brakes, but no antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, there are
no antilock brakes and there is
a problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light
on page 4-17.
Speed Sensitive Power
Steering (SSPS)
Warning Light
If the warning light stays on, or
comes on while driving, the Speed
Sensitive Power Steering may
not be working. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
This light should come on briefly as
the engine is started.
Vehicles with this feature, have a
warning light that comes on briefly
when the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN as a check to show it is
working.
If the warning light does not come
on, have it fixed so it will be able to
warn if there is a problem.
If there is a tire with low tire
pressure, the light will stay on or
come back on.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 9-48 for more information.
Instruments and Controls
Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning Light
StabiliTrak® Indicator
Light
4-19
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8-21 for more information.
Contact your dealer/retailer, if
the light does not come on or if it
stays on.
This warning light comes on briefly
when the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN.
It also comes on when the Traction
Control System is turned off by
pressing the TRAC OFF button.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 8-21 for more information.
If it stays on or comes on while
driving, there is a problem with the
Traction Control System (TCS),
contact your dealer/retailer.
This light warns that there is a
problem with the Traction Control
System (TCS) or the Vehicle
Stability Control (VSC) system.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage
The light comes on when the ignition
is turned to ON/RUN.
If the light comes on while driving,
the system is not working.
The TCS light comes on when the
VSC system warning light comes on,
even if the TRAC OFF button is
not pressed.
See StabiliTrak® System on
page 8-22 for more information on
Vehicle Stability Control System.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant
temperature. If the gage pointer
moves into the red area, the engine
is too hot. Pull off the road, stop
the vehicle, and turn off the engine
as soon as possible. See Engine
Overheating on page 9-22.
4-20
Instruments and Controls
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems. It makes sure
that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle,
helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
United States
Canada
This light comes on when the ignition
is on, but the engine is not running,
as a check to show it is working. If it
does not, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
If the check engine light comes on
and stays on, when the engine
is running, this indicates that there
is an OBD II problem and service
is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem
is apparent. Heeding the light can
prevent more serious damage to the
vehicle. This system assists the
service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this light
on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well,
the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and
the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead
to costly repairs that might
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Notice: Modifications made
to the engine, transmission,
exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
the vehicle or the replacement
of the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead
to costly repairs not covered
by the vehicle warranty. This
could also result in a failure
to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
See Accessories and
Modifications on page 9-3.
Instruments and Controls
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
The following can prevent more
serious damage to the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled
as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park the
vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at
least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps
and see your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has been
detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction
might be corrected by doing
the following:
• Make sure the fuel cap is fully
installed. See Filling the Tank on
page 8-38. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly
installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap allows fuel to evaporate into
the atmosphere. A few driving
trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light off.
• If the vehicle has been driven
through a deep puddle of water,
the vehicle’s electrical system
might be wet. The condition is
usually corrected when the
electrical system dries out.
A few driving trips should turn
the light off.
4-21
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with
quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration, or
stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions
occurs, change the fuel brand
used. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel
to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on
page 8-36.
If none of the above have made the
light turn off, your dealer/retailer can
check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical
or electrical problems that might
have developed.
4-22
Instruments and Controls
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local
governments have or might begin
programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on the vehicle.
Failure to pass this inspection could
prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to
help the vehicle pass an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the check engine
light is on with the engine
running, or if the key is in the
ON/RUN and the light is not on.
inspection. This can happen if
the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system
is designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems
during normal driving. This can
take several days of routine
driving. If this has been done
and the vehicle still does not
pass the inspection for lack
of OBD II system readiness,
your dealer/retailer can prepare
the vehicle for inspection.
Security Light
• The vehicle will not pass
this inspection if the OBD II
(on-board diagnostic) system
determines that critical emission
control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the
system. The vehicle would
be considered not ready for
For information regarding this light
and the vehicle’s security system,
see Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-10.
Oil Pressure Light
{ CAUTION
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
The oil pressure light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on have the
vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
Instruments and Controls
If the light comes on and stays on,
it means that oil is not flowing
through the engine properly.
The vehicle could be low on oil and
might have some other system
problem.
Fog Lamp Light
Lights On Reminder
This light comes on whenever the
headlights are on.
See Exterior Lamps Controls on
page 5-1 for more information.
For vehicles with this feature,
this light comes on whenever the
front fog lamps are on.
See Exterior Lamps Controls on
page 5-1 for more information.
Taillamp Indicator Light
4-23
Cruise Control Light
The CRUISE light comes on when
the cruise control is on.
See Cruise Control on page 4-4 for
more information.
Low Washer Fluid
Warning Light
Canada Only
This light will come on when your
taillamps are on.
See Exterior Lamps Controls on
page 5-1 for more information.
Canada Only
This light comes on when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 9-24 for more information.
4-24
Instruments and Controls
Service All-Wheel Drive
Light
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on briefly when
the ignition is turned on, and the
engine is not running, as a check to
show you it is working.
This light comes on when the
high-beam headlamps are in use.
It should go out when the engine is
started. It should go out when the
engine is started. If it stays on, or
comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the system.
Have it checked by your dealer/
retailer.
The four-wheel-drive indicator will
light up when the All-Wheel drive
is active.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 4-7 for more
information.
Door Ajar Light
This light comes on if any door,
the rear liftgate, or the rear liftglass
are not completely closed.
Fuel Gage
United States
Canada
The fuel gage shows about how
much fuel is in the fuel tank.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates
that the fuel filler door is on the driver
side of the vehicle. The fuel gage
works only when the ignition switch is
turned to ON/RUN. When the gage
first indicates E or empty, there is still
about 2 gallons ( 7.6 L) of fuel left,
but more needs to be added right
away. When the vehicle is low on fuel
the low fuel warning light, located
below the empty mark, comes on.
Instruments and Controls
Five things that do not indicate a
problem with the fuel gage:
Low Fuel Warning Light
4-25
OnStar® System
• At the gas station, the fuel pump
shuts off before the gage reads
F or full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gage indicated.
For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half
full, but it actually took more
or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill it.
• It takes the gage several minutes
to read F or full after filling the
vehicle with fuel.
• The gage moves a little when
you turn, stop or speed up.
• The gage does not go back to
E or empty when you turn off
the ignition.
United States
Canada
This light, on the fuel gage, comes
on when the fuel tank is low on
fuel. To turn if off, add fuel to the
fuel tank.
OnStar uses several innovative
technologies and live advisors to
provide a wide range of safety,
security, information, and
convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to
make an automatic call to OnStar
Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be
sent to your location. If the keys are
locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a signal
sent to unlock the doors. OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, including
30 trial minutes good for 60 days, is
available on most vehicles. Press the
OnStar button to have an OnStar
advisor contact Roadside Service.
4-26
Instruments and Controls
OnStar service is provided subject
to the OnStar Terms and Conditions
included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
Some services such as Remote Door
Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location
Assistance may not be available until
the owner of the vehicle registers
with OnStar. After the first prepaid
year, contact OnStar to select a
monthly or annual subscription
payment plan. If a payment plan is
not selected, the OnStar system
and all services, including airbag
notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer
available. For more information
visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada), or press
the OnStar button to speak with an
advisor.
Not all OnStar services are available
on all vehicles. To check if this
vehicle is able to provide the
services described below, or for a
full description of OnStar services
and system limitations, see the
OnStar Owner’s Guide in the
glove box or visit www.onstar.com
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada),
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY
1-877-248-2080, or press the
OnStar button to speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor
OnStar Services Available
with the Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
Airbag Deployment
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location
Assistance
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle
Alert
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with
30 trial minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience
Services
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
eligible OnStar subscribers to make
and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is
fully integrated into the vehicle, and
can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Most vehicles
include 30 trial minutes good for
60 days. Hands-Free Calling can
also be linked to a Verizon Wireless
service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada,
depending on eligibility.
Instruments and Controls
To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove
box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak with
an OnStar advisor by pressing
the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of
OnStar Hands-Free Calling that uses
minutes to access location-based
weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. Press the phone
button and give a few simple voice
commands to browse through the
various topics. See the OnStar
Owner’s Guide for more information.
This feature is only available in the
continental U.S.
How OnStar Service Works
The OnStar system can record
and transmit vehicle information.
This information is automatically
sent to an OnStar Call Center when
the OnStar button is pressed, the
emergency button is pressed, or if
the airbags deploy. This information
usually includes the vehicles GPS
location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the
crash that the vehicle was involved in
(e.g. the direction from which the
vehicle was hit). When the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the
vehicle also sends OnStar the
vehicles GPS location so they can
provide services where it is located.
OnStar service cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area. OnStar service also
cannot work unless the vehicle is in
a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity
and reception when the service is
needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service.
Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote
or enclosed areas, or at all times.
4-27
Location information about the
vehicle is only available if the GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed
and available.
The vehicle must have a working
electrical system, including adequate
battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are
other problems OnStar cannot
control that may prevent OnStar from
providing OnStar service at any
particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important
parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,
tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if
the OnStar advisor cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar buttons
is red, the system may not be
functioning properly. If the light
appears clear (no light is appearing),
your OnStar subscription has
expired and all services have been
deactivated. Press the OnStar button
to confirm that the OnStar equipment
is active.
4-28
Instruments and Controls
✍ NOTES
Lighting
Lighting
Lighting
The exterior lamp switch has three
positions:
Exterior Lamps Controls
( (Off):
Lighting
Exterior Lamps Controls .....5-1
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) ....................5-2
Automatic Headlamp
System .............................5-2
Fog Lamps .........................5-2
Instrument Panel
Brightness .........................5-3
Dome Lamp(s) ....................5-3
Entry Lighting .....................5-3
Reading Lamps ..................5-4
Battery Run-Down
Protection .........................5-4
5-1
Turns off all lamps, except
the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
; (Parking Lamps):
Turns on
the parking lamps together with the
following:
The lever on the left side of the
steering column operates the
exterior lamps.
P / ; (Exterior Lamps): Turn the
outside band of the lever to operate
the lamps. For vehicles sold in the
U.S., P appears on the instrument
panel cluster when the exterior
lamps are on. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, ; appears in the
instrument panel cluster. See Lights
On Reminder on page 4-23.
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamp
Instrument Panel Lights
5 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
Headlamps on Reminder
A tone sounds when the ignition is
turned to LOCK/OFF, the driver
door is opened and the key
is removed from the ignition while
the lamps are on.
5-2
Lighting
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day. Fully functional DRL are
required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada.
The DRL system makes the
headlamps come on at a reduced
brightness when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on with the
engine running.
• The exterior lamps switch is off.
• The parking brake is released.
When the exterior lamp switch
is turned to the headlamp position,
the DRL go off and the headlamps
come on. The other lamps that
come on with the headlamps also
come on.
The headlamps automatically switch
from DRL to the regular headlamps
depending on the darkness of
the surroundings. See “Automatic
Headlamp System” following.
DRL also comes on if only the
parking lamps are being used.
Automatic Headlamp
System
When it is dark enough outside,
the automatic headlamp system
turns on the low-beam headlamps at
the normal brightness along with
other lamps such as the taillamps,
sidemarker, parking lamps and
instrument panel lights. An indicator
light on the instrument panel comes
on when the headlamps are on.
See Instrument Panel Cluster on
page 4-12.
If the vehicle is driven through a
parking garage, overcast weather, or
a tunnel, the automatic headlamp
system may turn on. There is
a delay before the lights turn on
when starting the car at night.
Do not cover the automatic light
sensor, located on the top left corner
of the instrument panel. If the
sensor is covered the headlamps
will stay on continuously.
Fog Lamps
# (Fog Lamps):
For vehicles with
fog lamps, move the band on the turn
signal/multifunction lever to # to turn
them on. The fog lamps only come
on when the headlamps are on
low beam.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be
on along with the fog lamps.
Lighting
Instrument Panel
Brightness
Dome Lamp(s)
Entry Lighting
The interior lamps control is located
on the overhead lamp. To change
the interior lamps setting, slide
the switch to one of the following
positions:
After all the doors and liftgate
are closed, and the key is out of
the ignition, in LOCK/OFF or
ACC/ACCESSORY, the light
remains on for about 15 seconds
and then goes out, except under
the following conditions:
OFF: Turns the lamp off.
Use the trip odometer knob located
on the right side of the instrument
panel cluster to adjust the
instrument panel brightness.
Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to brighten
or dim the instrument panel.
The brightness of the instrument
panel lights decreases when
the headlamps are on.
5-3
ON: Keeps the lamp on all
the time.
• The ignition is turned to
Door: Turns the lamp on when
any door or the liftgate is opened.
The lamp goes off when all the side
doors and the liftgate are closed.
• All the doors and the liftgate are
If the lamp switch is in the door
position and a door is left open,
the lamps will go off automatically
after 20 minutes.
When any door is unlocked with the
key or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system transmitter, the light comes
on for 15 seconds, even if the door is
not opened.
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
after all the doors and liftgate
are closed.
locked and the light is still on.
5-4
Lighting
Reading Lamps
For vehicles with a sunroof, there is
a reading lamp near the sunroof
switch.
Battery Run-Down
Protection
OFF: Turns the lamp off.
The vehicle has a battery saver
feature designed to protect
the vehicle’s battery.
ON: Keeps the lamp on all
the time.
This feature will only work with the
dome lamp in the Door position.
Door: Turns the lamp on when
any door or the liftgate is opened.
The lamp goes off when all the side
doors and the liftgate are closed.
When any interior lamp is left on
and the ignition is turned off,
the battery rundown protection
system automatically turns the lamp
off after 20 minutes. This prevents
draining of the battery.
Infotainment
Infotainment
Audio System(s)
Audio System(s) .................6-1
Setting the Clock ................6-2
Radio(s) .............................6-3
Using an MP3 ....................6-9
XM Radio Messages .........6-12
Audio Steering Wheel
Controls ..........................6-13
Radio Reception ...............6-14
Fixed Mast Antenna ..........6-14
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System ..............6-14
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle
has and read the following pages to
become familiar with its features.
{ CAUTION
Taking your eyes off the road for
extended periods could cause
a crash resulting in injury or
death to you or others. Do not
give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to
many audio and non audio listings.
6-1
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
• Become familiar with the
operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.
For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 8-17.
6-2
Infotainment
Setting the Clock
The radio has a CLOCK button for
adjusting the time and date.
The date does not automatically
display. To see the date press
CLOCK while the radio is on.
The date with display times out after
a few seconds and goes back to
the normal radio and time display.
To adjust the time and date:
1. Turn the ignition key to
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
2. Press the PWR VOL
(Power/Volume) knob to
turn on the radio.
3. Press the CLOCK button, and
the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
(hour, minute, month, day,
and year) categories display.
4. Press the button under the
category to be adjusted.
5. To increase the time or date,
do one of the following: turn
the TUNE ADJ (Tune/Adjust)
knob clockwise, press
SEEK/TRACK y, press
FWD ( (Forward), or continue
to press the button under the
category to be adjusted.
6. To decrease the time or date,
do one of the following:
turn the TUNE ADJ knob
counterclockwise, press
SEEK/TRACK z, or press
REV ) (Reverse).
7. To save the settings, press
the CLOCK button, or let
the display time out.
To change the time default setting
from 12 hour to 24 hour, and to
change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Press the CLOCK button
and then the button below the
forward arrow label on the
display. The 12H and 24H, and
the date MMDD (month and
day) and DDMM (day and month)
categories will display.
2. Press the button below the
12H or 24H label, and the
date MMDD (month and day) or
DDMM (day and month) label
to choose how the radio displays
the time and date.
3. To save the settings, press
the CLOCK button, or let
the screen time out.
Infotainment
Radio(s)
6-3
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to select AM, FM,
or XM.
TUNE ADJ (Tune/Adjust): Turn to
select radio stations.
y SEEK TRACKz:
Press to go to
the previous or next radio station.
The radio only stops at stations with
a strong signal.
SCAN: Press to enter scan mode.
The radio will display Scanning,
then goes to the next station, plays
for a few seconds, then continues
on to the next station. Press SCAN
again to stop scanning. The radio
only stops at stations with a
strong signal.
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with CD (Base) similar
Playing the Radio
PWR VOL (Power/Volume): Press
to turn the radio on and off. Turn
the PWR VOL knob to adjust
the volume.
CLOCK: Press to adjust the time.
See Setting the Clock on page 6-2
for more information.
INFO (Information) (FM-RDS,
XM™ Satellite Radio Service, and
MP3 Features): Press to display
information for the current FM-RDS,
XM station, or MP3 song. Choose
from Channel, Song, Artist, and
CAT (category).
NO INFO displays when information
is not available from the station.
6-4
Infotainment
Setting Preset Stations
To store a radio station as a favorite:
FAV (Favorites): Press to select
up to six pages of favorites.
Each page contains six favorite
stations, and each page of favorites
can contain any combination of
AM, FM, or XM™ stations.
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
For vehicles without XM, only
four pages of favorites are available.
4. Repeat the steps to store another
radio station.
To setup the number of favorites
pages:
1. Press the MENU button to
display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the button located below
the FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of
favorites pages by pressing
the button located below
the displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the
menu time out, to return to the
radio screen.
2. Press the FAV button to
display the page where it can
be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the
six buttons until a beep sounds.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
To adjust the bass, midrange, and
treble:
1. Press the TUNE ADJ knob.
2. Turn the TUNE ADJ knob, or
press the button below BASS,
MID, or TREB so it is highlighted.
EQ (Equalization): To select
customized equalization settings:
1. Press EQ.
2. Press the button below the label:
POP, ROCK, COUNTRY, TALK,
JAZZ, and CLASSICAL.
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)
To adjust the balance or fade,
perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE ADJ knob.
2. Turn the TUNE ADJ knob
or press the button below BAL
FADE so it is highlighted.
3. Press the TUNE ADJ knob to
select the tone to adjust.
4. Turn the TUNE ADJ knob
to adjust the level.
4. Turn the TUNE ADJ knob to
adjust the audio balance to
the right or the left speakers
and the fade to adjust the audio
volume to the front or rear
speakers.
5. Press the TUNE ADJ knob to set
the adjustment.
5. Press the TUNE ADJ knob to set
the adjustment.
3. Press the TUNE ADJ knob
to select BASS, MID, or TREB.
Infotainment
Finding a Category (CAT)
Station (XM Satellite Radio
Service Only)
Scanning Categories (CAT)
(XM Satellite Radio
Service Only)
If CAT times out and is no longer
on the display, return to Step 1.
To scan a desired category:
To select and find a desired
category:
1. Press the CAT button.
2. Turn the TUNE ADJ knob to
select a category.
3. Press y or z to go to the
category’s first station, when the
desired category is displayed.
4. Press y or z to go to another
station within the selected
category.
5. Press CAT to exit the category
select mode or wait for CAT to
time out.
NOT FOUND displays if the desired
category cannot be found.
1. Press the CAT button to enter
the category select mode.
2. Turn the TUNE ADJ knob to
select a category.
3. Press y or z for two seconds
to scan the stations in the
selected category.
4. Press y or
scanning.
z again to stop
NOT FOUND displays if the desired
category cannot be found.
6-5
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service
that is based in the 48 contiguous
United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio
has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited
access to XM Radio Online for when
you are not in your vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM
service. For more information,
contact XM at www.xmradio.com
or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.
and www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
6-6
Infotainment
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are
available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS:
• Stations can be selected based
on programming.
• Stations with traffic
announcements can be selected.
• Announcements concerning local
and national emergencies can be
received.
• Messages display from radio
stations.
RDS relies on receiving specific
information from radio stations and
only works when the information
is available. In rare cases, a
radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly.
Contact the radio station if this
happens.
When the radio is tuned to an RDS
station, the station name or call
letters display instead of the
frequency. RDS stations can also
provide the time of day, a program
type (PTY) for current programming,
and the name of the program being
broadcast.
RDS Messages
ALERT: Displays when local or
national emergency announcements
are received. If the radio tunes to
a related network station for the
announcement, it returns to the
original station when the
announcement ends. The
announcement should be heard
even if the volume is low or a CD is
playing. If a CD is playing, it will stop
playing during the announcement.
• The RDS alert feature is not
supported by all RDS radio
stations.
• The RDS alert feature cannot be
turned off.
• Alert is not affected by tests of the
emergency broadcast system.
MSG (Message): Displays if the
current RDS station has a message.
The message displays the artist,
song title, call in phone numbers,
etc. If the entire message does not
display, parts of the message appear
every three seconds until the
message is completed. MSG
disappears from the display once the
completed message has displayed.
Radio Messages for XM Only
See XM Radio Messages on
page 6-12 later in this section for
further detail.
Infotainment
Playing a CD
The CD player can play the smaller
3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with an
adapter ring.
1. Insert a CD label side up
partway into the slot.
2. The CD player pulls the CD in
and begins playing.
3. The CD symbol and track
number displays.
4. The CD stays in the player if the
ignition or radio is turned off.
5. If the CD was the last source
selected, it resumes playing
when the radio is turned on.
Y
(EJECT): Press and release to
eject a CD. Once ejected it can be
removed. If the CD is not removed
after several seconds the CD player
automatically pulls the disc back into
the player and starts playing.
6-7
TUNE ADJ: Turn the TUNE ADJ
knob to select tracks on the CD.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
play a CD when listening to the radio.
y SEEK TRACK z: Press y to
go to the start of the current
track, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press z to go to the
next track. Holding or pressing
y or z multiple times causes the
player to continue moving backward
or forward through the tracks on
the CD.
Press the CD/AUX button again and
the system begins playing audio from
the connected portable audio player.
If a portable audio player is not
connected, “No Input Device Found”
displays.
( FWD REV ) (Fast Forward/
Fast Reverse): Press and hold (
to advance playback quickly within a
track. Release to resume playing the
track. Press and hold ) to reverse
playback quickly within a track.
Release to resume playing the track.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack”
later in this section.
INFO (Information): Press to
switch the display between the
track number, elapsed time of the
track, and the time. When the
ignition is off, press this button to
display the time.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select
an equalization setting while playing
a CD. See “EQ” listed previously for
more information. If an EQ setting is
selected for a CD, it is activated each
time a CD is played.
6-8
Infotainment
Care of CDs
The sound quality of the CD player
can be reduced because of:
• The CD-R quality.
• The method of recording
the CD-R.
• The quality of the music that has
been recorded on the CD-R.
• The way the CD-R has been
handled.
Store CD-R(s) in their original cases
or other protective cases and
away from dust and direct sunlight.
The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface
of a CD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD may not play properly or at
all. Do not touch the bottom side of
a CD while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the
outer edge.
To clean a CD, use a soft lint free
cloth, or dampen a clean soft cloth
in a mild neutral detergent solution
mixed with water. Wipe the CD from
the center to the edge.
Care of The CD Player
Use a marking pen to identify CDs,
do not add labels.
Do not use CD lens cleaners; they
could damage the CD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD,
or more than one CD is inserted
into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched
or damaged CDs, the CD player
could be damaged. While using
the CD player, use only CDs in
good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep
the CD player and the loading slot
free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
Playing an MP3 CD-R Disc
Radios with the MP3 feature are
capable of playing an MP3 CD-R
disc. For more information on how to
play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using
an MP3 later in this section.
CD Messages
If the CD ejects, it could be for
one of the following reasons:
• The CD player is very hot.
When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• The road is very rough. When
the road becomes smoother,
the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait
about an hour and try again.
• The format of the CD might not
be compatible. See Using an
MP3 later in this section.
Infotainment
• A problem may have occurred
while burning the CD.
• The label could be caught in the
CD player.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if
an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer/retailer. If the
radio displays an error message,
write it down and provide it to your
dealer/retailer when reporting
the problem.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio has an auxiliary input
jack located on the lower right side
of the faceplate. This is not an
audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. An external
audio device such as an iPod,
laptop computer, MP3 player, CD
changer, etc. can be connected
to the auxiliary input jack for use
as another audio source.
To use a portable audio player,
connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable
to the radio’s front auxiliary input
jack. When a device is connected,
press the radio CD/AUX button
to begin playing audio from
the device over the vehicle
speakers.
PWR VOL (Power/Volume): Turn
to adjust the volume. Additional
volume adjustments may have to be
made from the portable device if
the volume is too quiet or not loud.
BAND: Press to listen to the
radio when a portable audio device
is playing.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
play a CD when a portable audio
device is playing. Press again
and the system begins playing
audio from the connected portable
audio player.
6-9
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R Disc
MP3 Format
The MP3 player will only play
CD-R discs. It can read and play a
maximum of:
• 50 folders
• 11 folders in depth
• 50 playlists
• 10 sessions
• 255 files
All folders, playlists, sessions and
files over the maximum are ignored.
Record an MP3 disc:
• Onto a CD-R disc.
• Record playlists with an .m3u or
.wpl extension.
• Do not mix standard audio and
MP3 files on the same disc.
• Record the entire disc at once.
• Finalize the disc when recording
an MP3 disc with multiple
sessions.
6-10
Infotainment
Root Directory
Order of Play
File System and Naming
The root directory is treated as a
folder. All .mp3 files in the root
directory are accessed before
folders in the root directory.
CDs that have playlists play the
tracks in the following order:
The radio display shows, track
names that are shorter than
39 characters. Names that are
longer are shortened. The track
name appears as:
Empty Directory or Folder
Empty folders and directories do
not display. The system ignores
empty directories and folders and
advances to the next directory
or folder that has .mp3 files in it.
No Folder
On a CD that contains only .mp3
files in the root directory the
next and previous folder functions
do not work.
On a CD that contains playlists
and .mp3 files the next and previous
folder functions search playlists
first and then search .mp3 files in
the root folder.
1. After the first track in the first
playlist ends, play continues
sequentially through all tracks
in each playlist
2. After the last track of the last
playlist ends, play restarts
from the first track of the first
playlist.
CDs that do not have playlists play
the tracks in the following order:
1. The first file in the root directory
plays.
2. After all files from the root
directory have played, files in the
folders play.
3. After playing the last file from the
last folder, play restarts with the
first file in the root directory.
• The song name that is in the
ID3 tag.
• The file name without the file
extension if the song name is
not in the ID3 tag.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Playlists are accessed before files
or folders in the root directory.
Preprogrammed playlists created
by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™,
or Real Jukebox™ software can
be accessed and are treated
as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
Infotainment
Music Navigator
The music navigator feature lets
MP3 CDs play in order by artist or
album.
• The MP3 player scans the disc
to sort the files by artist and
album ID3 tag information.
• It can take several minutes to
scan the disc depending
on the number of MP3 files
recorded to the CD-R.
• The radio starts playing while
the disc is being scanned.
• After the scan is finished,
the disc starts playing.
Playing an MP3
The MP3 player can play the
smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs
with an adapter ring.
1. Insert a CD label side up
partway into the slot.
2. The CD player pulls the CD in
and begins playing.
3. The CD stays in the player if the
ignition or radio is turned off.
4. If the CD was the last source
selected, it resumes playing
when the radio is turned on.
Y
(EJECT): Press and release
to eject a CD. Once the disc is
ejected it can be removed.
If the CD is not removed after
several seconds the CD player
automatically pulls the disc back
into the player and starts playing.
y SEEK TRACK z:
Press to go to
the start of the current track, if
more than ten seconds have played.
Press z to go to the next track.
Holding or pressing y or z multiple
times will cause the player to
continue moving backward or
forward through the tracks on
the CD.
6-11
( FWD REV ) (Fast Forward/
Fast Reverse): Press and hold )
to advance playback quickly within
a track. Release ( to resume
playing the track. Press and hold )
to reverse playback quickly within a
track. Release ( to resume
playing the track.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing.
INFO (Information): Press when
an MP3 CD is loaded, then press
the button below the Song, Artist,
Album, or Folder label to view
the information.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
play a CD when listening to the
radio.
Press the CD/AUX button again and
the system begins playing audio
from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player
is not connected, “No Input Device
Found” displays.
6-12
Infotainment
RDM (Random): Press the button
below the RDM label to hear
the tracks in random order.
S c (Previous Folder):
Press
the button below to go to the
first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder):
Press
the button below to go to the first
track in the next folder.
h
(Music Navigator): Press the
button below to play MP3 files in
order by artist or album.
SORT: Press the button below the
SORT label to change between
playback by artist or album while
using the Music Navigator.
BACK: Press the button below the
BACK label to return to the main
music navigator screen.
S T (Previous/Next):
Press the
button below to go to the next
or previous artist or album in
alphabetical order while using
the Music Navigator.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels):
These channels, or any others, can
be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating: The encryption code
in the receiver is being updated,
and no action is required. This
process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal: The system is
functioning correctly, but the vehicle
is in a location that is blocking
the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the
signal should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is
acquiring and processing audio
and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear
shortly.
CH Off Air: This channel is not
currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail: This previously
assigned channel is no longer
assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the presets,
choose another station for that
preset button.
No Info: No artist, song title,
category, or text information is
available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
No Info: No text or informational
messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
Not Found: There are no channels
available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Infotainment
XM Locked: The XM™ receiver in
your vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM™ receivers cannot
be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having
your vehicle serviced, check
with your dealer/retailer.
Audio Steering Wheel
Controls
Chk XMRcvr: If this message does
not clear within a short period of
time, the receiver may have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
ª«(Next/Previous): Press to
select the next or previous radio
station, CD track, or MP3 folder.
• Press ª or « to go to the next
or previous preset station.
• Press and hold ª or « until a
beep is heard to go to the next
or previous radio station.
Only stations with a strong
signal will be selected.
Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message alternates with
the XM™ Radio eight digit radio
ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there may be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
6-13
• Press ª or « to go to the next
or previous CD track.
• Press and hold ª or « until a
For vehicles with audio steering
wheel controls some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the following:
− q + (Volume): Press to
decrease or increase the volume.
beep is heard to go to the next or
previous MP3 folder.
MODE: Press to turn the audio
system on or to select between AM,
FM, XM, CD, or AUX.
Press and hold to turn the audio
system off.
6-14
Infotainment
Radio Reception
FM Stereo
Fixed Mast Antenna
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
FM stereo gives the best sound,
but FM signals only reach about
10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere
with FM signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
The fixed mast antenna can
withstand most car washes without
being damaged. If the mast should
ever become slightly bent, straighten
it out by hand. If the mast is badly
bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure
the mast is still tightened to the
antenna base located on the roof
of the vehicle. If tightening is
required, tighten by hand.
AM
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere
with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
digital radio reception from
coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just
as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or through tunnels could
cause loss of the XM signal for a
period of time. The radio may
display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate
interference.
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is
located on the roof of the vehicle.
Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the
performance of the XM system may
be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of
the vehicle can interfere with the
performance of the XM system.
Make sure the XM Satellite Radio
antenna is not obstructed.
Climate Controls
Climate Controls
7-1
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
Climate Controls
Climate Control System ......7-1
Outlet Adjustment ...............7-3
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter ............................7-4
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
this system.
Fan Control
9
(Fan): Turn the center knob
toward 4 to turn the system
on or increase fan speed.
If the airflow seems low when the
fan is at the highest setting, the
passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. For more
information, see Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 7-4
and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11-4.
7-2
Climate Controls
Temperature Control
Turn the right knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the temperature inside
the vehicle.
Air Delivery Mode Control
Turn the left knob to select from the
following modes:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the
upper instrument panel outlets.
)
(Bi-Level): Air is directed to
the upper instrument panel outlets
and the floor outlets.
6 (Floor):
Air is directed to the
floor and side window outlets.
-
(Defog): Air is directed between
the windshield, side windows,
instrument panel outlets and the
floor outlets.
Use the defog mode to clear the
inside of the windshield of fog
or moisture and to warm the
passengers. The air conditioning
compressor runs automatically
in this setting without pressing A/C,
unless the outside temperature
is at or below 32°F (0°C).
Air Conditioning
1 (Defrost): Air is directed to
the windshield, instrument panel
outlets and the side windows.
MAX A/C (Maximum Air
Conditioning): Press the A/C and
recirculation buttons at the same
time to select MAX A/C.
Use the defrost mode to remove
fog or frost from the outside of the
windshield more quickly. The air
conditioning compressor runs
automatically in this setting without
pressing A/C, unless the outside
temperature is at or below
32°F (0°C).
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
For vehicles with this feature, there
will be the following controls:
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to
turn the air conditioning system
on or off. An indicator light shows
that it is on.
On hot days, open the windows to
let hot inside air escape; then close
them. The vehicle will cool quicker
and the A/C system operates more
efficiently.
Because the A/C system removes
moisture from the air, it is normal
for a small amount of water to
drip under the vehicle while idling
or just after turning the engine off.
Climate Controls
Recirculation
? (Recirculation): Press to
turn the recirculation mode on or off.
An indicator light shows that it is on.
This mode recirculates the air inside
the vehicle and helps to heat or cool
the air more quickly. It can be used to
prevent outside air and odors from
entering the vehicle.
Press the button again to turn
the recirculation mode off and the
outside air mode on. Recirculation
is automatically turned off when the
climate control system mode knob
is turned to defog, defrost, or is
positioned between modes.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to clear fog from the
rear window. It will only work when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
= (Rear Defogger):
Press to turn
the rear window defogger on or off.
An indicator light shows that it is on.
Depending on the vehicle, the rear
window defogger either stays on until
it is manually turned off or turns off
automatically after a set amount of
time. Clear any snow from the rear
window.
If the ignition is turned off, while
the rear window defogger is on, the
defogger turns back on automatically
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position again.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade
or sharp object to clear the inside
rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines
in the rear glass. These actions
may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
7-3
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located in
the center and outboard sides of
the instrument panel, to change the
direction of the air flowing through
the vents.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or
leaves from the outside air
inlets at the base of the
windshield.
• Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
• Keep the area under the
front seats clear of objects for
more effective air circulation.
• If the airflow seems low when
the fan is at the highest setting,
the passenger compartment air
filter might need to be replaced.
For more information, see
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter later in this section.
7-4
Climate Controls
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The access panel for the air filter is
behind the glove box. To replace
the filter:
Both outside and recirculated
air are routed through a passenger
compartment air filter. Pollen, dust
particles and other contaminants
are removed by the filter. Airflow
reductions indicate that the filter
needs to be replaced. For a
replacement filter see your dealer/
retailer. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 11-4 for replacement
intervals.
2. Push the side fastener to release
and remove the filter cover.
1. Open the glove box door. Push
each side of the glovebox in
and pull out to remove.
Climate Controls
3. Remove the air filter.
4. Install a new air filter and
reassemble the unit by reversing
the steps.
Replacing the air filter is
recommended, but will not
damage the vehicle if it is not.
7-5
7-6
Climate Controls
✍ NOTES
Driving and Operating
Driving and
Operating
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In .........8-2
Ignition Positions ................8-2
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) .....................8-4
Starting the Engine .............8-4
Engine Coolant Heater .......8-5
Automatic Transmission
Operation (Four Speed) ....8-6
Automatic Transmission
Operation (Five Speed) .....8-8
Manual Transmission
Operation ........................8-11
Parking Brake ...................8-12
Shifting Into Park ..............8-13
Shifting Out of Park ..........8-14
Parking the Vehicle
(Manual Transmission) ....8-15
Parking Over Things
That Burn ........................8-16
Engine Exhaust .................8-16
Running the Vehicle
While Parked ..................8-17
Driving Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving ..............8-17
Drunk Driving ....................8-18
Control of a Vehicle ..........8-18
Braking .............................8-19
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) .................8-20
Traction Control
System (TCS) .................8-21
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
System ............................8-22
StabiliTrak® System ..........8-22
Steering ............................8-23
Off-Road Recovery ............8-24
Passing .............................8-25
Loss of Control .................8-25
Driving at Night .................8-26
8-1
Driving in Rain and on
Wet Roads ......................8-27
Before Leaving on a
Long Trip ........................8-28
Highway Hypnosis .............8-28
Hill and Mountain Roads ...8-28
Winter Driving ...................8-29
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ...8-31
Rocking Your Vehicle to
Get It Out .......................8-31
Loading the Vehicle ..........8-32
Fuel
Fuel ..................................8-36
Gasoline Octane ...............8-36
Gasoline Specifications .....8-36
California Fuel ..................8-36
Additives ...........................8-37
Fuels in Foreign
Countries ........................8-37
Filling the Tank .................8-38
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container ........................8-40
8-2
Driving and Operating
Starting and
Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does
not need an elaborate break-in.
But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow
these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one
constant speed, fast or slow,
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle
starts. Avoid downshifting
to brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for
the first 200 miles (322 km) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings
can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has four different
positions.
To shift out of P (Park), turn the
ignition to ON/RUN and apply
the brake pedal.
• Do not tow a trailer during
break-in. See Towing a Trailer
on page 9-77 for the trailer
towing capabilities of your
vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed
and load can be gradually
increased.
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key to turn in the ignition could
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct key,
make sure it is all the way in, and
turn it only with your hand. If the
key cannot be turned by hand,
see your dealer/retailer.
Driving and Operating
LOCK/OFF: This is the only position
from which you can remove the key.
This locks the steering wheel,
ignition and automatic transmission.
Push in the ignition switch as you
turn the key toward you.
On vehicles with an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must be
in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK/OFF position.
A warning tone will sound if the driver
door is opened with the key in the
ignition.
The ignition switch can bind in the
LOCK/OFF position with your wheels
turned off center. If this happens,
move the steering wheel from right
to left while turning the key to
ACC/ACCESSORY. If this doesn’t
work, then the vehicle needs service.
{ CAUTION
On manual transmission vehicles,
turning the key to LOCK/OFF and
removing it will lock the steering
column and result in a loss of
ability to steer the vehicle.
This could cause a collision.
If you need to turn the engine
off while the vehicle is moving,
turn the key only to ACC/
ACCESSORY. Do not push the
key in while the vehicle is moving.
ACC/ACCESSORY: This position
provides power to some of the
electrical accessories. It unlocks the
steering wheel and ignition. To move
the key from ACC/ACCESSORY to
LOCK/OFF, push in the key and then
turn it to LOCK/OFF.
A warning tone will sound when
the driver door is opened when the
ignition is still in ACC/ACCESSORY
or LOCK/OFF and the key is in the
ignition.
8-3
ON/RUN: The ignition switch stays
in this position when the engine is
running. This position can be used to
operate the electrical accessories,
including the ventilation fan and
115 volt power outlet, as well as to
display some warning and indicator
lights. The transmission is also
unlocked in this position on
automatic transmission vehicles.
The battery could be drained
if you leave the key in the ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
with the engine off. You may not be
able to start the vehicle if the battery
is allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
START: This position starts the
engine. When the engine starts,
release the key. The ignition switch
will return to ON/RUN for normal
driving.
8-4
Driving and Operating
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories may be
used for less than a minute after
the engine is turned off.
• Power Windows, if equipped
• Sunroof, if equipped
The power windows and sunroof
will continue to work for less than a
minute or until either front door is
opened. The radio will work when
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY.
Starting the Engine
Automatic Transmission
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart
when you are already moving,
use N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Shifting into P (Park)
with the vehicle moving could
damage the transmission.
Shift into P (Park) only when
your vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in
NEUTRAL and the parking brake
engaged. Hold the clutch pedal
to the floor and start the engine.
The vehicle will not start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition to START.
When the engine starts, let go of
the key. The idle speed will go
down as the engine gets warm.
Vehicles equipped with
the 1.8L engine have a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position,
and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for
a about 30 seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds,
cranking will be stopped after
25 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine is
already running. Engine cranking
can be stopped by turning
the ignition switch to ACC/
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
Vehicles equipped with the
2.4L engine should not be
cranked for more than
30 seconds at a time.
This may overheat the
starter and wiring systems.
Notice: Holding the key in
START for longer than 15 seconds
at a time will cause the battery to
be drained much sooner. And
the excessive heat can damage
the starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to
help avoid draining the battery
or damaging the starter.
Driving and Operating
2. If the engine does not start, wait
about 15 seconds and try again
to start the engine by turning
the ignition to START. Wait about
15 seconds between each try.
When the engine has run
about 10 seconds to warm up,
the vehicle is ready to be driven.
Do not run the engine at high
speed when it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing
(32°F or 0°C), let the engine run
for a few minutes to warm up.
3. If the engine still will not start, or
starts but then stops, it could be
flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and holding
it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds.
If the vehicle starts briefly but then
stops again, do the same thing,
but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears
the extra gasoline from the
engine.
Notice: The engine is designed
to work with the electronics in
the vehicle. If electrical parts or
accessories are added, you could
change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer/retailer. If you do not,
the engine might not perform
properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater, if
available, can help in cold weather
conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C)
for easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least
four hours before starting the vehicle.
8-5
To Use the Engine Coolant
Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord. The electrical
cord is located on the driver side
of the engine compartment.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.
{ CAUTION
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause
an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
8-6
Driving and Operating
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep
it away from moving engine
parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
Automatic Transmission
Operation (Four Speed)
{ CAUTION
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer
in the area where you will be parking
the vehicle for the best advice
on this.
The shift lever is located on the
console between the seats.
P (Park): This position locks the
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot
move easily.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have
to. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift
lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 8-13. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 9-77.
Make sure the shift lever is
fully in P (Park) before starting
the engine. The vehicle has
an automatic transmission
shift lock control system.
Driving and Operating
You must fully apply the regular
brake first and move the shift lever to
the right before you can shift from
P (Park) when the ignition key is in
ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
lever, then push the shift lever all the
way into P (Park) as you maintain
brake application. Then move the
shift lever to the right and move the
shift lever into another gear. See
Shifting Out of Park on page 8-14.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse)
only after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and
forth to get out of snow, ice or sand
without damaging the transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 8-31.
8-7
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart the vehicle when
it is already moving, use N (Neutral)
only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the
vehicle is being towed.
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
{ CAUTION
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h)
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)
or N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure
the engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
• Going less than 35 mph
(56 km/h), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
or more, push the accelerator
all the way down.
Notice: If the vehicle seems to
start up rather slowly or not shift
gears when you go faster, and you
continue to drive the vehicle that
way, you could damage the
transmission. Have the vehicle
serviced right away. You can drive
in L2 (Low) when you are driving
less than 35 mph (56 km/h) and
D (Drive) for higher speeds
until then.
2 (Second): This position reduces
vehicle speed more than D (Drive)
without using the brakes. You
can use 2 (Second) on hills.
8-8
Driving and Operating
It can help control vehicle speed as
you go down steep mountain roads,
but then you would also want to use
the brakes off and on.
Automatic Transmission
Operation (Five Speed)
{ CAUTION
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
L (Low): This position reduces
vehicle speed even more than
2 (Second) without using the brakes.
You can use it on very steep hills,
or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in L (Low),
the transmission will not shift
into low gear until the vehicle
is going slow enough.
The shift lever is located on the
console between the seats.
P (Park): This position locks the
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when starting the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have
to. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift
lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 8-13. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 9-77.
Make sure the shift lever is
fully in P (Park) before starting
the engine. The vehicle has
an automatic transmission
shift lock control system.
Driving and Operating
You must fully apply the regular
brake first and move the shift lever to
the right before shifting from P (Park)
while the ignition key is in ON/RUN.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park),
ease pressure on the shift lever and
push the shift lever all the way into
P (Park) as you maintain brake
application. Then move the shift
lever into another gear. See Shifting
Out of Park on page 8-14.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse)
only after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and
forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand
without damaging the transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 8-31.
8-9
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with
the wheels. To restart the engine
when the vehicle is already moving,
use N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle
is being towed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)
or N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure
the engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
{ CAUTION
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy from the vehicle.
If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
• Going less than 35 mph
(55 km/h), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h)
or more, push the accelerator
all the way down.
8-10
Driving and Operating
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
DSC mode allows you to choose
the top gear limit of the vehicle’s
transmission and the vehicle’s speed
while driving down hill or towing a
trailer. To use this feature, do the
following:
1. Move the shift lever from
D (Drive) left to S (Shift Control).
While driving in this mode,
the transmission will remain
in the driver selected range.
When coming to a stop, the
vehicle will automatically shift
into 1 (First) gear.
2. Move the shift lever forward to
increase the gear range, or
rearward to decrease the gear
range available based upon your
current driving conditions and
needs.
The number displayed in the
instrument cluster is the highest gear
that the transmission will be allowed
to operate in. However, your vehicle
can automatically shift to lower gears
as required by various driving
conditions. This means that all gears
below that number are available.
The transmission will only allow
shifting into gears appropriate
for the vehicles speed and engine
revolutions per minute (RPM):
The display in the instrument
cluster will change from the currently
displayed message to 4 (Fourth)
when you enter S (Shift Control),
and change to indicate the requested
gear range when moving the shift
lever forward or rearward.
• The transmission will not allow
While using the DSC feature the
transmission will have firmer shifting
and sportier performance. You can
use this for sport driving or when
climbing hills to stay in gear longer
or to downshift for more power or
engine braking.
• The transmission will not
automatically shift to the next
higher gear if the vehicle speed
or engine RPM is too high.
shifting to the next lower gear if
the vehicle speed or engine RPM
is too high. An audible warning
will sound and the downshift will
not be allowed. The downshift
request will have to be made
again once the vehicle reaches
an acceptable speed.
4
3
3
2
2
1
Downshift
Requested
(Fourth) to
(Third)
(Third) to
(Second)
(Second) to
(First)
Required
Vehicle Speed
Below 95 mph
(153 km/h)
Below 60 mph
(97 km/h)
Below 30 mph
(48 km/h)
Driving and Operating
Manual Transmission
Operation
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal and
shift into 1 (First). Then, slowly let
up on the clutch pedal as you press
the accelerator pedal.
8-11
You can shift into 1 (First) when
you are going less than 20 mph
(32 km/h). If you have come to a
complete stop and it is hard to shift
into 1 (First), put the shift lever in
NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch.
Press the clutch pedal back down.
Then shift into 1 (First).
To stop, let up on the accelerator
pedal and press the brake pedal.
Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,
and shift to NEUTRAL.
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal
as you let up on the accelerator
pedal and shift into 2 (Second).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.
R (Reverse): To back up, press
down on the clutch pedal and shift
into R (Reverse). Let up on the
clutch pedal slowly while pressing
the accelerator pedal.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth):
Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth)
and 5 (Fifth) the same way you
do for 2 (Second). Slowly let up
on the clutch pedal as you press
the accelerator pedal.
Neutral: Use this position when
you start or idle the engine.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse)
only after the vehicle is stopped.
Also, use R (Reverse) along with
the parking brake for parking
your vehicle.
8-12
Driving and Operating
Shift Speeds
{ CAUTION
If you skip a gear when you
downshift, you could lose control
of your vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift
down more than one gear at a
time when you downshift.
Manual Transmission
Recommended Shift Speeds
Engine
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
This chart shows the maximum
allowable speeds in each gear when
maximum acceleration is necessary.
Engine
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
1.8L
34 mph
(55 km/h)
56 mph
(91 km/h)
82 mph
(132 km/h)
121 mph
(195 km/h)
2.4L
31 mph
(50 km/h)
53 mph
(86 km/h)
82 mph
(132 km/h)
112 mph
(181 km/h)
If your speed drops below 20 mph
(32 km/h), or if the engine is not
running smoothly, you should
downshift to the next lower gear.
You may have to downshift two or
more gears to keep the engine
running smoothly or for good
performance.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the
brake pedal down and pull up on the
parking brake lever. If the ignition
is on, the brake system warning light
will come on.
Driving and Operating
If you are towing a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 9-77.
Shifting Into Park
{ CAUTION
To release the parking brake, hold
the brake pedal down. Pull the
parking brake lever up until you can
press the release button. Hold the
release button in as you move the
lever all the way down.
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature wear
or damage to brake system parts.
Make sure that the parking brake
is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 9-77.
8-13
To shift into P (Park), do the
following:
1. Hold the brake pedal down
and set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 8-12
for more information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by pushing the lever all the way
toward the front of the vehicle
and to the left.
3. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle
with the key in your hand, the
vehicle is in P (Park).
8-14
Driving and Operating
Leaving Your Vehicle
With the Engine Running
(Automatic Transmission)
{ CAUTION
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running,
it could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
If you have to leave an automatic
transmission vehicle with the engine
running, be sure the vehicle is in
P (Park) and the parking brake
is firmly set before you leave it.
Torque Lock (Automatic
Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you
do not shift into P (Park) properly, the
weight of the vehicle may put too
much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it
difficult to pull the shift lever out of
P (Park). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the
parking brake and then shift into
P (Park) properly before you leave
the driver seat. To find out how, see
Shifting Into Park on page 8-13.
Move the shift lever out of P (Park)
before you release the parking
brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may
need to have another vehicle push
yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in
the transmission, so you can pull the
shift lever out of P (Park).
Shifting Out of Park
This vehicle has an electronic shift
lock release system. The shift
lock release is designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal
unless the shift lever is in
P (Park).
• Prevent movement of the shift
lever out of P (Park), unless
the ignition is in ON/RUN and
the brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock release is always
functional except in the case of
an uncharged or low voltage
(less than 9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
page 9-71 for more information.
Driving and Operating
To shift out of P (Park) use the
following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of
P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever.
2. Hold the brake pedal down.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional
towing service.
Parking the Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
Before you get out of the vehicle,
move the shift lever into R (Reverse),
and firmly apply the parking brake.
Once the shift lever has been placed
into R (Reverse) with the clutch
pedal pressed in, you can turn the
ignition key to LOCK/OFF, remove
the key and release the clutch.
If you are parking on a hill, or if
the vehicle is pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 9-77.
8-15
Evaporation Pump
The vehicle is equipped with
a vacuum pump for the fuel
evaporation system. This pump
performs a fuel evaporation leakage
test approximately five hours
after the engine is turned off.
You may hear a sound coming
from underneath the rear cargo
compartment for several minutes.
The noise is normal and does not
signify a malfunction. See your
dealer/retailer with any questions.
8-16
Driving and Operating
Parking Over Things
That Burn
{ CAUTION
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
{ CAUTION
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
• The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
• The vehicle’s exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or after-market
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
Driving and Operating
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
{ CAUTION
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust Engine Exhaust on
page 8-16.
{ CAUTION
It can be dangerous to get out
of the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have
to. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift
lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be
sure the vehicle will not move.
See Shifting Into Park on page 8-13.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 9-77.
8-17
Driving Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
your safety belt, see Safety Belts on
page 1-8.
{ CAUTION
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do and be ready.
In addition:
• Allow enough following
distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
8-18
Driving and Operating
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION
Drinking and then driving is
very dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by
even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
Police records show that
almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these deaths
are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years,
more than 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol,
with about 250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to
drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological, and
developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol
in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries
to the brain, spinal cord, or heart.
This means that when anyone who
has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than
if the person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help
to control your vehicle while
driving — brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of
your vehicle.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer
accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 9-3.
Driving and Operating
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 4-17.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. First, you
have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then
you have to bring up your foot and do
it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about
three-fourths of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or
three seconds or more with another.
Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play
a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths
of a second, a vehicle moving at
60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet
(20 m). That could be a lot of
distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the
surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of
the road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy;
tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the
amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy
braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration
followed by heavy braking — rather
than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. The brakes might
not have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking.
If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
8-19
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops
while you are driving, brake normally
but do not pump the brakes. If you
do, the pedal could get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you
will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you
brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it can take longer to stop and the
brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer
accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 9-3.
8-20
Driving and Operating
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock
Brake System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that
will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and
begin to drive away, ABS will check
itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on, and you might even
notice that the brake pedal moves a
little. This is normal.
United States
Canada
If there is a problem with ABS,
this warning light will stay on.
See Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on page 4-18.
Let us say the road is wet and you
are driving safely. Suddenly, an
animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes and continue
braking. Here is what happens
with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling,
the computer will separately work
the brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
you steer around the obstacle while
braking hard.
As you brake, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed
and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time you need to get your foot
up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you
get too close to the vehicle in front of
you, you will not have time to apply
the brakes if that vehicle suddenly
slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even though
you have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and
let antilock work for you. You might
hear the antilock pump or motor
operate, and feel the brake
pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
you more than even the very best
braking.
Driving and Operating
Traction Control
System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control
system that limits wheel spin. This
is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. The system operates
only if it senses that one or both of
the drive wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system works the front
brakes and reduces engine power to
limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system
working, but this is normal. Leave the
system on during ordinary driving so
that it can operate when needed.
When the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN, the system automatically
turns on. If the system has been
turned off, it will automatically turn on
at 35 mph (55 km/h). TCS cannot be
turned off above 35 mph (55 km/h).
This light should come on briefly
when the engine is started.
The traction control system warning
light flashes and an alarm will
sound intermittently when the
system is limiting wheel spin.
The g switch is located to the left
of the steering wheel below the
instrument panel cluster.
When getting the vehicle out of mud
or newly fallen snow, turn off the
traction control system. The system
that controls engine performance
interferes with the process of freeing
8-21
the front wheels. To turn off traction
control, press and release
the g switch. The traction control
system warning light will come on.
To turn the traction control system
back on, press the g switch again
or increase vehicle speed and the
system will automatically turn back
on. The traction control system
warning light will go off. See Traction
Control System (TCS) Warning Light
on page 4-19 Traction Control
System (TCS) Warning Light for
more information.
To turn off both the traction control
system and StabiliTrak®, press
and hold the g switch while
the vehicle is stopped. The traction
control system warning light and
the VSC OFF light will come on.
8-22
Driving and Operating
To turn the systems back on,
press the g switch again. If both
systems are turned off, they will not
turn back on automatically when
vehicle speed increases.
If the VSC OFF light flashes,
there is a problem in the traction
control system or StabiliTrak.
Adding non-GM accessories can
affect your vehicle’s performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 9-3 Accessories and
Modifications for more information.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
System
If your vehicle has this feature,
engine power is sent to all four
wheels all the time. This is like
four-wheel drive, but it is fully
automatic.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle has StabiliTrak. This
system helps provide integrated
control of systems such as the
Antilock Brake System, traction
control and engine control. This
system automatically controls the
brakes and engine to help prevent
the vehicle from skidding when
cornering on a slippery road surface
or turning the steering wheel
abruptly.
This system activates when your
vehicle speed reaches or exceeds
9 mph (15 km/h), and deactivates
when the vehicle speed reduces to
below 9 mph (15 km/h).
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds
when the engine is started or just
after the vehicle begins to move.
This means that the system is in
the self-check mode, but does not
indicate a problem.
If the vehicle is going to skid during
driving, the traction control system
warning light flashes and an alarm
sounds intermittently. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
To turn off both the traction control
system and StabiliTrak, press
and hold the g switch while the
vehicle is stopped.
Driving and Operating
The traction control system warning
light and the VSC OFF light will come
on. To turn the systems back on,
press the g switch again. If both
systems are turned off, they will not
turn back on automatically when
vehicle speed increases.
If the VSC OFF light flashes,
there is a problem in the traction
control system or StabiliTrak.
8-23
Steering
Steering Tips
If the engine stalls while you are
driving, the power steering assist
system will continue to operate until
you are able to stop your vehicle.
If you lose power steering assist
because the electric power steering
system is not functioning, you can
steer, but it will take more effort.
It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
If you turn the steering wheel in
either direction several times until it
stops, or hold the steering wheel in
the stopped position for an extended
amount of time, you may notice a
reduced amount of power steering
assist. The normal amount of power
steering assist should return shortly
after a few normal steering
movements.
If you need to reduce speed, do it
before you enter the curve, while the
front wheels are straight ahead.
The electric power steering
system does not require regular
maintenance. If you suspect steering
system problems, contact your
dealer/retailer for service repairs.
Traction in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road
surface, the angle at which the curve
is banked, and your speed. While in
a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Try to adjust the speed so you can
drive through the curve. Maintain
a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the
curve, and then accelerate gently
into the straightaway.
8-24
Driving and Operating
Steering in Emergencies
Off-Road Recovery
There are times when steering can
be more effective than braking.
For example, you come over a hill
and find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot; there is not room. That is the
time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle’s right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
Your vehicle can perform very
well in emergencies like these.
First apply the brakes. See Braking
on page 8-19. It is better to remove
as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around
the problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.
If you are holding the steering wheel
at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock
positions, you can turn it a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear
safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is
only slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy.
Ease off the accelerator and then, if
there is nothing in the way, steer so
that your vehicle straddles the edge
of the pavement. Turn the steering
wheel 3 to 5 inches, 76 to 127 mm,
(about one-eighth turn) until the right
front tire contacts the pavement
edge. Then turn the steering wheel
to go straight down the roadway.
Driving and Operating
Passing
Loss of Control
Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane road can be dangerous.
To reduce the risk of danger
while passing:
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
• Look down the road, to the sides,
and to crossroads for situations
that might affect a successful
pass. If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement
markings, and lines that could
indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or
double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle
you want to pass. Doing so can
reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow
vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease
to the right.
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control
of the vehicle. Defensive drivers
avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing
conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
8-25
The three types of skids correspond
to your vehicle’s three control
systems. In the braking skid, the
wheels are not rolling. In the steering
or cornering skid, too much speed
or steering in a curve causes tires
to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering
quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
8-26
Driving and Operating
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
you want to slow down and adjust
your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance
is longer and vehicle control more
limited.
Driving at Night
While driving on a surface with
reduced traction, try your best to
avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle
speed by shifting to a lower gear.
Any sudden changes could cause
the tires to slide. You might not
realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by
Remember: Any Antilock Brake
System (ABS) helps avoid only the
braking skid.
Night driving is more dangerous
than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs,
with night vision problems, or
by fatigue.
Night driving tips include:
adjusting the inside rearview
mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space
between you and other vehicles
because headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
•
•
•
•
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Avoid staring directly into
approaching headlamps.
• Keep the windshield and all glass
on your vehicle clean — inside
and out.
• Keep your eyes moving,
especially during turns or curves.
No one can see as well at night as
in the daytime. But, as we get older,
these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at
least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Driving and Operating
Driving in Rain and on
Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
{ CAUTION
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in
a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
8-27
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is
to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
• Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under your vehicle’s
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road
is wet enough and you are going
fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
reservoir filled.
• Have good tires with proper tread
depth. See Tires on page 9-41.
• Turn off cruise control, if
equipped.
8-28
Driving and Operating
Before Leaving on a
Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, consider having it serviced
by your dealer/retailer before
departing.
Things to check on your own
include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid:
Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All
levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are
lenses clean?
• Tires: Are treads good? Are
tires inflated to recommended
pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to
travel? Have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Always be alert and pay attention
to your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find
a safe place to park your vehicle
and rest.
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan
the road ahead and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
• Keep the vehicle serviced
and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills,
shift to a lower gear.
{ CAUTION
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
Driving and Operating
{ CAUTION
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or
with the ignition off is dangerous.
The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would
not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going
downhill.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in
your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something
could be in your lane (stalled car,
accident).
• Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the road,
creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when
freezing rain begins to fall, resulting
in even less traction. Avoid driving on
wet ice or in freezing rain until roads
can be treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
surface under the tires even more.
8-29
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 8-20 improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on
a slippery roads, but apply the
brakes sooner than when on
dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance
on any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can occur
on otherwise clear roads in shaded
areas. The surface of a curve or an
overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid
sudden steering maneuvers and
braking while on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
on slippery surfaces.
8-30
Driving and Operating
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in
a serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside
Assistance Program on page 12-5.
To get help and keep everyone in
the vehicle safe:
• Turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 4-3.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside
mirror.
{ CAUTION
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may cause
exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from
around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that
is blocking the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
• Open a window about
two inches on the side of
the vehicle that is away from
the wind to bring in fresh air.
• Fully open the air outlets
on or under the instrument
panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside
the vehicle and set the fan
speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System
in the Index.
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 8-16.
Snow can trap exhaust gases
under your vehicle. This can
cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so
you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
exhaust
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm,
but be careful.
Driving and Operating
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm the
vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the
way to save heat. Repeat this until
help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold.
Moving about to keep warm also
helps.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help with
the headlamps. Do this as little as
possible to save fuel.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck
in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It
Out on page 8-31.
{ CAUTION
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin
at high speed, they can explode,
and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment
fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and
avoid going above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 9-60.
8-31
Rocking Your Vehicle to
Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right
to clear the area around the front
wheels. Turn off any traction or
stability system. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transmission,
between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and
R (Reverse), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator pedal
while shifting, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward
and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. If that does not get the
vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see
Towing Your Vehicle on page 9-75.
8-32
Driving and Operating
Loading the Vehicle
It is very important to know how
much weight your vehicle can
carry. Two labels on the vehicle
show how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification label.
Tire and Loading Information
Label
{ CAUTION
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or
rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). If you do, parts on
the vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your
vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and
crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of the vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle’s center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s
door open you will find the label
attached below the door lock post
(striker). The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds. This
weight includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows the
tire size of the original equipment
tires (C), and the recommended
cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and
inflation see Tires on page 9-41
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 9-47.
There is also important loading
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front
and rear axle. See “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Driving and Operating
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement
“The combined weight
of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs
and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available
cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs).
8-33
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 9-77 for important
information on towing a trailer,
towing safety rules and
trailering tips.
Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs
(453 kg).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs
(136 kg).
C. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 700 lbs
(317 kg).
8-34
Driving and Operating
The combined weight of the
driver, passengers, and cargo
should never exceed the
vehicle’s maximum vehicle
capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 1,000 lbs
(453 kg).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs
(340 kg).
C. Available Cargo
Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg).
Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 3 = 1,000 lbs
(453 kg).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 = 1,000 lbs
(453 kg).
C. Available Cargo
Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg).
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire
and Loading Information label
for specific information about
the vehicle’s capacity weight
and seating positions.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification
label is attached to the center
pillar, near the driver’s door
latch. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle,
called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR).
Driving and Operating
The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel,
and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for the vehicle, or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front
or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy
load, you should spread it out.
See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in
this section.
Notice: Overloading your
vehicle may cause damage.
Repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Do not
overload your vehicle.
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or
rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). If you do, parts on
the vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your
vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and
crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of the vehicle.
Things you put inside your
vehicle can strike and injure
people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the rear area
of your vehicle. Try to
spread the weight evenly.
If you have fold-down rear
seats, you will find four
anchors on the back wall
If you put things inside your
vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
(Continued)
CAUTION
•
•
•
•
8-35
(Continued)
of your trunk. You can use
these anchors to tie down
lighter loads. They are not
strong enough for heavy
things, however, so put
them as far forward as
you can in the trunk or
rear area.
Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure
it whenever you can.
Do not leave a seat folded
down unless you need to.
8-36
Driving and Operating
Fuel
Gasoline Specifications
Use of the recommended fuel
is an important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet
ASTM specification D 4814 in the
United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5
or 3.511 in Canada. Some
gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Additives on
page 8-37 for additional information.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline
with a posted octane rating of 87 or
higher. If the octane rating is less
than 87, you might notice an audible
knocking noise when you drive,
commonly referred to as spark
knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon
as possible. If you are using gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, the engine
needs service.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards,
it is designed to operate on fuels
that meet California specifications.
See the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California emissions
standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control
system performance might be
affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp could turn on and the vehicle
might fail a smog-check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 4-20. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of
fuel used, repairs might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Driving and Operating
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now required
to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits
from forming, allowing the emission
control system to work properly.
In most cases, you should not have
to add anything to the fuel. However,
some gasolines contain only
the minimum amount of additive
required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and
intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty
injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline. Also, your
dealer/retailer has additives that
will help correct and prevent most
deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines might
be available in your area.
We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under
the vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are
not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
8-37
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the
performance of the emission
control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
If you plan on driving in another
country outside the United States or
Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded
gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text
on fuel. Costly repairs caused
by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask
an auto club, or contact a major
oil company that does business
in the country where you will
be driving.
8-38
Driving and Operating
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island.
Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are
near fuel or refueling the vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking
materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The fuel door release lever is near
the floor under the driver seat
on the outboard side.
The tethered fuel cap is located
behind a hinged fuel door on
the driver side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it
slowly counterclockwise. On some
vehicles you may have to push
in while turning the cap.
While refueling, hang the fuel cap
inside of the fuel door.
Driving and Operating
{ CAUTION
Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly
burned. This spray can happen if
the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss
noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Do not to spill fuel. Do not top off
or overfill the tank and wait a few
seconds to remove the nozzle. Clean
fuel from painted surfaces as soon
as possible. See Exterior Cleaning
on page 9-86.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn
it clockwise until it clicks. Make
sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 4-20.
{ CAUTION
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
8-39
Notice: If you need a new fuel
cap, be sure to get the right type.
Your dealer/retailer can get one for
you. If you get the wrong type, it
may not fit properly. This may
cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the
fuel tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 4-20.
8-40
Driving and Operating
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
{ CAUTION
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while
it is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact
•
•
with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.
Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.
Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel.
Vehicle Service and Care
Vehicle Service
and Care
Service
Service ...............................9-2
Accessories and
Modifications .....................9-3
California Proposition
65 Warning .......................9-3
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements .....9-3
Doing Your Own
Service Work ....................9-4
Adding Equipment to the
Outside of the Vehicle ......9-4
Owner Checks
Owner Checks ....................9-5
Hood Release .....................9-5
Engine Compartment
Overview ...........................9-6
Engine Oil ..........................9-9
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ....9-12
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ................................9-14
Manual Transmission
Fluid ................................9-16
Hydraulic Clutch ................9-17
Cooling System .................9-18
Engine Coolant .................9-18
Pressure Cap ....................9-22
Engine Overheating ...........9-22
Power Steering Fluid .........9-24
Windshield Washer Fluid ...9-24
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement ...................9-25
Brakes ..............................9-27
Battery ..............................9-30
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming ..............9-30
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement .............9-31
Halogen Bulbs ..................9-31
Headlamps and Parking
Lamps .............................9-31
Taillamps ..........................9-33
License Plate Lamp ..........9-34
Replacement Bulbs ...........9-35
9-1
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical
Equipment .......................9-35
Headlamp Wiring ..............9-35
Windshield Wiper Fuses ....9-36
Power Windows and
Other Power Options .......9-36
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers .........................9-36
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block ...............................9-36
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block ......................9-39
Tires
Tires .................................9-41
Tire Sidewall Labeling .......9-42
Tire Terminology and
Definitions .......................9-44
Inflation - Tire Pressure ....9-47
Tire Pressure Monitor
System ............................9-48
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation ........................9-50
Tire Inspection and
Rotation ..........................9-53
When It Is Time for New
Tires ...............................9-54
9-2
Vehicle Service and Care
Buying New Tires .............9-54
Different Size Tires and
Wheels ............................9-56
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading ...........................9-56
Wheel Alignment and
Tire Balance ....................9-58
Wheel Replacement ..........9-59
Tire Chains .......................9-60
Tire Changing
If a Tire Goes Flat ............9-61
Changing a Flat Tire .........9-62
Removing the Spare
Tire and Tools .................9-63
Removing the Flat Tire
and Installing the
Spare Tire .......................9-64
Storing a Flat or Spare
Tire and Tools .................9-68
Compact Spare Tire ..........9-70
Jump Starting
Jump Starting ...................9-71
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle .........9-75
Recreational Vehicle
Towing ............................9-75
Towing a Trailer ................9-77
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning ................9-83
Exterior Cleaning ..............9-86
Sheet Metal Damage ........9-89
Finish Damage ..................9-89
Underbody Maintenance ....9-90
Chemical Paint Spotting ....9-90
Service
For service and parts needs, visit
your dealer/retailer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one
of these marks:
Vehicle Service and Care
Accessories and
Modifications
When non-dealer/non-retailer
accessories are added to the vehicle,
they can affect vehicle performance
and safety, including such things
as airbags, braking, stability, ride
and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and
electronic systems like antilock
brakes, traction control, and stability
control. Some of these accessories
could even cause malfunction or
damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
GM Accessories are designed
to complement and function with
other systems on the vehicle.
Your GM dealer/retailer can
accessorize the vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When
you go to your GM dealer/retailer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the
work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 1-34.
California Proposition 65
Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle),
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
9-3
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained in
remote keyless transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
9-4
Vehicle Service and Care
Doing Your Own
Service Work
{ CAUTION
You can be injured and the
vehicle could be damaged if you
try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient
knowledge, experience, the
proper replacement parts, and
tools before attempting any
vehicle maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. English and
metric fasteners can be
easily confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts
can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service manual.
It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service
manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 12-16.
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your
own service work, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
on page 1-33.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date
of any service work performed.
See Part E: Maintenance Record
on page 11-20.
Adding Equipment to the
Outside of the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of
the vehicle can affect the airflow
around it. This can cause wind noise
and can affect fuel economy and
windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to
the outside of the vehicle.
Vehicle Service and Care
Owner Checks
Hood Release
To open the hood:
{ CAUTION
2. From the front of the vehicle,
pull up on the secondary
hood release located near
the middle of the hood.
3. Lift the hood.
An electric fan under the hood
can start up and injure you even
when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood
electric fan.
4. Release the hood prop rod from
its retainer and insert into the slot,
moving it straight up. If it is moved
to the side or toward the inside
of the vehicle, it may become
detached.
{ CAUTION
Things that burn can get on hot
engine parts and start a fire. These
include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant,
brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber.
You or others could be burned.
Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot
engine.
9-5
1. Pull the release handle, located
below the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel.
Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
Return the hood prop rod carefully
back to its retainer to avoid
damaging the vehicle.
9-6
Vehicle Service and Care
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 1.8L L4 engine, this is what you see.
Vehicle Service and Care
A. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
″Checking Engine Oil″ under
Engine Oil on page 9-9.
B. Pressure Cap on page 9-22.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 9-24.
D. Coolant Recovery Tank.
See Engine Coolant on
page 9-18.
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine
Oil on page 9-9.
F. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 9-12.
G. Brakes on page 9-27 and
Hydraulic Clutch on page 9-17
(If Equipped).
H. Engine Compartment Fuse Block
on page 9-39.
I. Battery on page 9-30.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on page 9-71.
K. Automatic Transmission
Fluid Dipstick. See ″Checking
the Fluid Level″ under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 9-14
(If Equipped) (Out of View).
9-7
9-8
Vehicle Service and Care
When you open the hood on the 2.4L L4 engine, this is what you see.
Vehicle Service and Care
A. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
“Checking Engine Oil” under
Engine Oil on page 9-9.
B. Pressure Cap on page 9-22.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 9-24.
D. Coolant Recovery Tank. See
Engine Coolant on page 9-18.
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine
Oil on page 9-9.
F. Brakes on page 9-27 and
Hydraulic Clutch on page 9-17
(If Equipped).
G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 9-12.
H. Engine Compartment Fuse Block
on page 9-39.
I. Battery on page 9-30.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on page 9-71.
K. Automatic Transmission
Fluid Dipstick. See ″Checking
the Fluid Level″ under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 9-14
(If Equipped) (Out of View).
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the
engine oil every time you get fuel.
In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the
vehicle must be on level ground.
9-9
The engine oil dipstick handle
is a yellow loop. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 9-6
for the location of the engine oil
dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the
oil several minutes to drain back
into the oil pan. If you do not
do this, the oil dipstick might
not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean
it with a paper towel or cloth,
then push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
9-10
Vehicle Service and Care
When to Add Engine Oil
1.8L Engine
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9-6 for the location of
the engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
2.4L Engine
If the oil is below the indent at
the tip of the dipstick, add at least
one quart/liter of the recommended
oil. This section explains what kind of
oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 10-2.
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
If the engine has so much oil
that the oil level gets above the
upper hole, the engine could
be damaged.
What Kind of Engine Oil
to Use
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-20
SAE 5W-20 is best for the
vehicle.
Vehicle Service and Care
These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity,
or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these requirements
should have the starburst symbol
on the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil
identified as meeting GM Standard
GM6094M and showing the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use
the recommended oil can result in
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
If you are in an area of extreme
cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommend that you use an
SAE 0W-20 oil. SAE 0W-20 oil
provides easier cold starting and
better protection for the engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine
Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil.
The recommended oils with the
starburst symbol that meet GM
Standard GM6094M are all you
need for good performance and
engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
When to Change Engine Oil
Change the oil and filter
every 5,000 miles (8 000 km) or
3 months, whichever occurs first.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11-4.
9-11
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain
elements that can be unhealthy for
your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your own
oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose
of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring
it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle
it by taking it to a place that collects
used oil.
9-12
Vehicle Service and Care
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is
in the engine compartment on
the driver side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9-6 for more information
on location.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the air
cleaner/filter at each engine oil
change. Replace the filter every
30,000 miles (48 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first.
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services on page 11-3 for more
information.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
2. Lift the cover.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
4. Reinstall the cover.
1.8L Engine
1. Release the two clips that hold
the cover.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-13
{ CAUTION
2.4L Engine
1. Release the three clips that hold
the cover.
2. Lift the cover.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
4. Reinstall the cover.
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you
or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air;
it helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. If it is not there and the
engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and
be careful working on the engine
with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter
is off, a backfire can cause a
damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into the engine,
which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when
you are driving.
9-14
Vehicle Service and Care
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
When to Check and Change
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check the fluid in the transmission
and differential at the intervals listed
in Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services on page 11-3, and be
sure to use the transmission fluid
listed in Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on
page 11-18.
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
This operation can be difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the
dealer/retailer service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow
all the instructions here, or you
could get a false reading on
the dipstick.
Notice: Use of the incorrect
automatic transmission fluid may
damage your vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the
automatic transmission fluid
listed in Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on
page 11-18.
Get the vehicle warmed up by
driving about 15 miles (24 km)
when outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder
than 50°F (10°C), you may have
to drive longer.
Wait at least 30 minutes before
checking the transmission fluid level
if you have been driving:
1. Park your vehicle on a level
place. Keep the engine running.
• When outside temperatures are
above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially
in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid
should be at normal operating
temperature, which is 158°F to
176°F (70°C to 80°C).
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
2. With the parking brake applied,
place the shift lever in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake
pedal, move the shift lever
through each gear range,
pausing for about three seconds
in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in P (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for
three to five minutes.
Vehicle Service and Care
Then, without shutting off the
engine, follow these steps:
The automatic transmission
dipstick has an orange handle
and is located near the front of the
engine compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 9-6
for more information on location.
1. Release the tab and pull out the
dipstick and wipe it with a clean
rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait
three seconds and then pull it
back out again.
4. If the fluid level is in the
acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way;
then press the tab down to
lock the dipstick in place.
How to Add Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use.
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11-18.
If the fluid level is low, add
only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level into the area
between dimples on the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
1.8L shown
3. Check both sides of the dipstick,
and read the lower level. The
fluid level must be between the
two dimples in the hot range.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add
enough fluid at the dipstick
hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid,
generally less than one pint
(0.5 L). Do not overfill.
9-15
Notice: Too much or too
little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean
that some of the fluid could come
out and fall on hot engine parts or
exhaust system parts, starting a
fire. Too little fluid could cause the
transmission to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the
fluid level as described under
“How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier
in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is
obtained, push the dipstick
back in all the way; then press
the tab down to lock the dipstick
in place.
9-16
Vehicle Service and Care
Manual Transmission
Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have your manual
transmission fluid level checked
is when the engine oil is changed.
However, the fluid in your manual
transmission does not require
changing.
How to Check
This operation can be difficult, you
may choose to have this done
at your dealer/retailer service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to
follow all the instructions here,
or you could get a false reading.
Notice: Too much or too
little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can
mean that some of the fluid could
come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts,
starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission
to overheat. Be sure to get
an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
How to Add Fluid
Check the fluid level only when your
engine is off, the vehicle is parked on
a level place and the transmission is
cool enough for you to rest your
fingers on the transmission case.
1. Remove the filler plug.
Then, follow these steps:
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is
up to the bottom of the filler
plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install
the plug and be sure it is fully
seated. If the fluid level is low,
add more fluid as described in
the next steps.
Here is how to add fluid. Refer
to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine what kind of fluid to
use. Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on
page 11-18.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole.
Add only enough fluid to bring
the fluid level up to the bottom
of the filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the
plug is fully seated.
Vehicle Service and Care
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in
your vehicle is self-adjusting.
The master cylinder reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake fluid.
When to Check and What
to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check
the fluid unless you suspect there
is a leak in the system. Adding fluid
will not correct a leak.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine how often you should
check the fluid level in your master
cylinder reservoir and for the proper
fluid. Part B: Owner Checks and
Services on page 11-12 and Part D:
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-18.
How to Check and Add Fluid
Check that the fluid level is at
or above the MIN mark. If the level
is below the MIN mark, see the
instructions on the reservoir cap.
The hydraulic clutch and brake
master cylinder use the same
reservoir.
A fluid loss in this system could
indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repaired.
9-17
The reservoir is located at the back
of the engine compartment, on the
driver side of the vehicle. Engine
Compartment Overview on page 9-6.
9-18
Vehicle Service and Care
Cooling System
When it is safe lift the hood:
{ CAUTION
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Pressure Cap
C. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there
is a leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The coolant in the vehicle should
last for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs
first. When coolant is added
or changed, use DEX-COOL®
coolant.
The following explains the cooling
system and how to add coolant when
it is low. If there is a problem with
engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 9-22 Engine
Overheating.
What to Use
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant, which will not damage
aluminum parts. If this coolant
mixture is used, nothing else
needs to be added.
Vehicle Service and Care
{ CAUTION
Adding only plain water to the
cooling system can be dangerous.
Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
The vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water
or the wrong mixture, the engine
could get too hot but would not
get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you
or others could be burned. Use a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use extra
inhibitors and/or additives in
your vehicle’s cooling system,
you could damage your vehicle.
Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this
manual for the cooling system.
See Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11-18 for
more information.
coolant may require changing
sooner, at 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL (silicate-free)
coolant in your vehicle.
• Gives freezing protection down to
The vehicle must be on a level
surface. When the engine is cold,
the coolant level should be at LOW,
or a little higher. When the engine
is warm, the level should be up to
FULL, or a little higher. If it is not,
there could be a leak at the pressure
cap or in the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump, or
somewhere else in the cooling
system.
−34°F (− 38°C).
• Gives boiling protection up to
265°F (129°C).
• Protects against rust and
corrosion.
• Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
9-19
• Lets the warning lights and gages
work as they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than
DEX-COOL can cause premature
engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine
Checking Coolant
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9-6 Engine Compartment
Overview for the location of the
coolant recovery tank.
9-20
Vehicle Service and Care
How to Add Coolant to the
Coolant Recovery Tank
{ CAUTION
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
{ CAUTION
If you need more coolant, add the
proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
at the coolant recovery tank, but
be careful not to spill it.
Occasionally check the coolant level
in the radiator. For information on
how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 9-18
Cooling System.
Adding only plain water to your
cooling system can be dangerous.
Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water
or the wrong mixture, your engine
could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and a proper
coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core and other
parts. Use the recommended
coolant and the proper coolant
mixture.
How to Add Coolant to the
Radiator
When the coolant in the coolant
recovery tank is at the FULL mark,
start the vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues,
there is one more thing that can
be done. Add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator but
be sure the cooling system is
cool before you do it.
Vehicle Service and Care
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the
radiator pressure cap — even a
little — they can come out at high
speed. Never turn the cap when
the cooling system, including the
radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and radiator
pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
Turning the radiator pressure cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot can allow steam and scalding
liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery
tank, you will almost never have
to add coolant at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the
engine and radiator are hot.
1. Remove the pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the
pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn
the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise until it first
stops. Do not press down while
turning the pressure cap.
9-21
If you hear a hiss, wait for that
to stop. A hiss means there
is still some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap,
but now push down while turning.
Remove the pressure cap.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper
coolant mixture, up to the base
of the filler neck. For more
information about the proper
coolant mixture look earlier in
this section.
9-22
Vehicle Service and Care
4. Then fill the coolant recovery
tank to the FULL mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant
recovery tank, but leave the
pressure cap off.
6. Start the engine and let it run
until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch
out for the engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level
inside the radiator filler neck may
be lower. If the level is lower,
add more of the proper coolant
mixture through the filler neck
until the level reaches the base
of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap.
At any time during this procedure
if coolant begins to flow out of
the filler neck, reinstall the
pressure cap. Be sure the ears
on the pressure cap are in
line with the vent tube.
Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and
possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9-6 for more information
on location.
Engine Overheating
A coolant temperature gage is
located on the vehicle’s instrument
panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 4-19.
Check to see if the electric engine
cooling fan is running. If the engine
is overheating, the fan should be
running. If it is not, the vehicle
needs service.
If no problem is apparent, but the
coolant level is not at or above the
FULL mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
recovery tank. See Engine Coolant
on page 9-18 for more information
about the proper coolant mixture.
If the coolant inside the coolant
recovery tank is boiling, do not do
anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on
a level surface.
Vehicle Service and Care
If Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
{ CAUTION
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it
off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait
until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your
engine is overheated, the liquids
in it can catch fire. You or others
could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
Notice: If the engine catches fire
because of being driven with no
coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but steam is not heard or
seen escaping, the problem may
not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too
hot when the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
Stops after high-speed driving.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
Tows a trailer.
9-23
If the overheat warning is displayed
with no sign of steam, try this for
a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off
the road, shift to P (Park)
or N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on the heater to full hot at
the highest fan speed and open
the windows as necessary.
If the overheat warning is no longer
displayed, the vehicle can be driven.
Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10 minutes. If the warning does not
come back on, continue to drive.
If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle
the engine for three minutes while
the vehicle is parked. If the warning
is still displayed, turn off the engine
and get everyone out of the vehicle
until it cools down.
9-24
Vehicle Service and Care
You may decide not to lift the
hood but to get service help
right away.
How to Check Windshield
Washer Fluid
Adding Washer Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
The vehicle has electronic power
steering and does not use power
steering fluid. If you suspect a
problem, see your dealer/retailer.
To check windshield washer fluid.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield
washer fluid, be sure to read the
manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your
vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
1. Pull dipstick out of windshield
washer reservoir.
2. Washer fluid should fill the holes
between the LOW (B) and
NORMAL (A) mark.
3. If the fluid reads LOW (B) add
fluid.
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid
until the holes of the dipstick are
filled between the LOW (B) and
NORMAL (A). See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 9-6 for reservoir location.
Vehicle Service and Care
Notice:
• When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
• Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage your
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean
as well as washer fluid.
9-25
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Front Windshield Wiper
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected at least twice a year for
wear or cracking. See At Least
Twice a Year on page 11-13.
Replacement blades come in
different types and are removed
in different ways. To remove
the wiper blade:
• Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank
if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in your windshield
washer. It can damage the
vehicle’s windshield washer
system and paint.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm
away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide
the wiper assembly toward the
driver side of the vehicle.
9-26
Vehicle Service and Care
Rear Windshield Wiper
3. Slide the new wiper assembly
into place.
4. Push the release lever down to
lock into place.
1. Disengage the two pins and
disconnect the rear wiper arm
by pulling them up.
2. Raise the wiper arm until it
comes off.
You will hear a clicking sound
when the arm comes off.
Vehicle Service and Care
Brakes
Brake Fluid
9-27
There are only two reasons why
the brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
• The brake fluid level goes down
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
• A fluid leak in the brake and/or
3. Push the rear wiper assembly
straight into the rear wiper arm.
4. Reengage the two pins to the
rear wiper arm by pushing
them down.
The brake master cylinder and,
on manual transmission vehicles,
the clutch hydraulic system use the
same reservoir. The reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake fluid.
clutch hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the
brake and/or clutch hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means
that sooner or later the brakes
and/or clutch will not work well.
9-28
Vehicle Service and Care
Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the brake
linings are worn, there will be too
much fluid when new brake linings
are installed. Add or remove fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done
on the brake/clutch hydraulic system.
{ CAUTION
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work
is done on the brake hydraulic
system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4-17.
What to Add
Notice:
Use only new DOT-3 brake fluid
from a sealed container. See
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11-18.
• Using the wrong fluid can
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.
{ CAUTION
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
brake or clutch hydraulic system,
the brakes or clutch might not
work well. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
badly damage brake or clutch
hydraulic system parts.
For example, just a few drops
of mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in the brake or clutch
hydraulic system can damage
brake or clutch hydraulic
system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong
kind of fluid.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle’s painted surfaces, the
paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on the vehicle. If you do,
wash it off immediately. See
Exterior Cleaning on page 9-86.
Vehicle Service and Care
Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake
pads are worn and new pads are
needed. The sound can come
and go or be heard all the time
the vehicle is moving, except when
applying the brake pedal firmly.
{ CAUTION
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake wear
warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive
with worn-out brake pads could
result in costly brake repair.
9-29
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
something is wrong with the brakes.
Brake Adjustment
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 10-2.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake
pedal does not return to normal
height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be required.
Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced — for example,
when the brake linings wear down
and new ones are installed — be
sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done,
the brakes might not work properly.
For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for
the vehicle, the balance between
the front and rear brakes can
change — for the worse. The braking
performance expected can change
in many other ways if the wrong
replacement brake parts are
installed.
9-30
Vehicle Service and Care
Battery
This vehicle has a maintenance
free battery. When it is time for a
new battery, see your dealer/retailer
for one that has the replacement
number shown on the original
battery’s label. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 9-6 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
{ CAUTION
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting
on page 9-71 for tips on working
around a battery without
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is
driven infrequently, remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery. This helps keep the battery
from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended
storage of the vehicle, remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an
extended period of time.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at
the factory and should need no
further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged
in a crash, the headlamp aim may
be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be
necessary if oncoming drivers flash
their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
If the headlamps need to be
re-aimed, it is recommended
that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Vehicle Service and Care
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs
on page 9-35.
Headlamps and Parking
Lamps
9-31
High-beam and Low-beam
Headlamps
To replace the High-beam or
Low-beam Headlamp:
1. Open the hood. See Hood
Release on page 9-5.
For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ CAUTION
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.
A. High-beam Headlamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp/Parking Lamp
C. Low-beam Headlamp
2. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull it out
of the headlamp assembly.
9-32
Vehicle Service and Care
Front Turn Signal Lamp and
Parking Lamp
To replace the Front Turn Signal
Lamp or Parking Lamp:
1. Open the hood. See Hood
Release on page 9-5.
3. Pull the old bulb straight out of
the bulb socket.
4. Push the new bulb straight in
until it clicks.
3. Unplug the connector while
pressing down on the release tab.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out.
5. Push the new bulb straight
in until it clicks.
6. Push the bulb socket into the
headlamp assembly and turn
it clockwise to secure it in
its original location.
2. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull
it out of the lamp assembly.
5. Push the bulb socket into
the lamp assembly and turn
clockwise to secure it in
its original location.
Vehicle Service and Care
Taillamps
9-33
To replace one of these lamps:
1. Open the liftgate.
Driver Side
A. Turn Signal Lamp
B. Stoplamp/Sidemarker
Lamp/Taillamp
C. Back-up Lamp
Passenger Side
2. Remove the storage
compartment cover in the rear
cargo area of the vehicle to
access the bulbs.
3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull it out.
9-34
Vehicle Service and Care
License Plate Lamp
To replace the license plate
lamp bulb:
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.
5. Push the new bulb straight in
until it clicks to secure.
6. Push the bulb socket in and turn
it clockwise to secure.
7. Reinstall the cover.
2. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it
from the license plate assembly.
1. Press the tabs in to disengage
them and remove the license
plate lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of
the bulb socket.
4. Push the new bulb straight in the
bulb socket until it clicks.
5. Push the bulb socket straight into
the license plate assembly and
turn it clockwise to secure it.
6. Reinstall the license plate
assembly into its original location
making sure the tabs reengage.
Vehicle Service and Care
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb
Number
High-beam
Headlamps
9005
Low-beam
Headlamps
9006
Sidemarker
Lamp/Stoplamp/
Taillamp
7443
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer/retailer.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless you
check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment
can damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
9-35
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle battery, even if the vehicle
is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-33.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected
by a circuit breaker. An electrical
overload will cause the lamps to
go on and off, or in some cases to
remain off. If this happens, have your
headlamp wiring checked right away.
9-36
Vehicle Service and Care
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is
protected by a circuit breaker and
a fuse. If the motor overheats due
to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will
stop until the motor cools. If the
overload is caused by some
electrical problem, and not snow
or ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and
Other Power Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block
protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker
opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
The wiring circuits in the vehicle
are protected from short circuits
by a combination of fuses, circuit
breakers and fusible thermal
links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by
electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band
inside the fuse. If the band is broken
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage
can be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
you can.
The fuse block is located under
the instrument panel on the driver
side of the vehicle.
Vehicle Service and Care
Fuses
8
9
10
11
Fuses
1
2
Usage
Parking Lamps,
License Plate
Lamps, Taillamp,
Multiport Fuel
Injection System/
Sequential Multiport
Fuel Injection
System, Instrument
Panel Lights
Switch Illumination
Fuses
3
4
5
6
7
Usage
Power Windows
Power Windows
Power Windows
Sunroof
Cigarette Lighter,
Accessory Power
Outlet
12
13
14
15
16
9-37
Usage
Outside Rearview
Mirrors, Audio
System, Main Body
Engine Control
Unit (ECU), Clock,
Brake Transmission
Shift Interlock
Empty
Empty
Airbag System,
Multiport Fuel
Injection System/
Sequential Multiport
Fuel Injection
System, Front
Passenger Occupant
Classification
System
Gages and Meters
Air Conditioning
System, Rear
Window Defogger
Windshield Wipers
Rear Window Wipers
Windshield Washer
9-38
Vehicle Service and Care
Fuses
17
18
19
Usage
Main Body ECU,
Electric Power
Steering, Electric
Cooling Fans,
Brake Transmission
Shift Interlock,
Antilock Braking
System (ABS),
Multiport Fuel
Injection
System/Sequential
Multiport Fuel
Injection System,
Tire Pressure
Monitoring
System (TPMS),
Vehicle Stability
Control System
Back-up Lamps,
Charging System,
Rear Window
Defogger
Onboard Diagnosis
System
Fuses
20
21
22
Usage
Stoplamps, Center
High-Mounted
Stoplamps (CHMSL),
ABS, Vehicle
Stability Control
System, Multiport
Fuel Injection
System/Sequential
Multiport Fuel
Injection System,
Brake Transmission
Shift Interlock
Power Door Lock
System
Outside Rearview
Mirrors, Audio
System, Main Body
ECU, Clock, Brake
Transmission Shift
Interlock, Cigarette
Lighter
Fuses
23
24
25
26
27
Usage
All-Wheel Drive
System
Front Foglamps
Ignition, Outside
Rearview Mirrors,
Audio System, Main
Body ECU, Clock,
Brake Transmission
Shift Interlock,
Cigarette Lighter
Rear Window
Defogger, Heated
Mirrors, Multiport
Fuel Injection
System/Sequential
Multiport Fuel
Injection System
Power Windows
Vehicle Service and Care
9-39
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
This engine compartment fuse block
is located in the engine compartment
on the driver side of the vehicle
near the air cleaner. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 9-6.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical components on
the vehicle may damage it.
Always keep the covers on
any electrical component.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
1
Electric
Cooling Fans
4
2
Electric
Cooling Fans
ABS, Vehicle
Stability Control
System
5
Air Conditioning
System
3
Antilock Braking
System (ABS),
Vehicle Stability
Control System
6
Charging System
7
Electric Power
Steering
9-40
Vehicle Service and Care
Fuses
Usage
8
Emission Control
System Main, Horn,
Ignition 2
Fuses
Usage
16
Multiport Fuel
Injection
System/Sequential
Multiport Fuel
Injection System
17
Turn Signal Lamps,
Hazard Lamps
18
Charging System
19
Starting System,
Multiport Fuel
Injection System/
Sequential Multiport
Fuel Injection
System
9
Headlamp Main
10
Emission Control
System 2
11
Multiport Fuel
Injection System/
Sequential Multiport
Fuel Injection
System
12
Driver Side
Headlamp
13
Passenger Side
Headlamp
20
14
Driver Side
Low-Beam
Headlamp,
Front Foglamps
21
Empty
15
Passenger Side
Low-Beam
Headlamp
22
Starting System
Starting System,
Multiport Fuel
Injection System/
Sequential Multiport
Fuel Injection
System
Fuses
Usage
23
Engine Immobilizer
System
24
Main Body ECU,
Gages, Daytime
Running
Lights (DRL),
Air Conditioning
System, Wireless
Remote Control,
Theft Deterrent
System
25
Audio System
26
Interior Lamps,
Personal Lamps,
Clock
27
Spare
28
Spare
29
Spare
30
Audio System
31
OnStar®
Vehicle Service and Care
Fuses
Usage
32
Multiport Fuel
Injection
System/Sequential
Multiport Fuel
Injection System,
Horn, Emission
Control System 1,
Emission Control
System 2
33
Horn
34
Multiport
Fuel Injection
System/Sequential
Multiport Fuel
Injection System,
Horn, Ignition, Meter
35
PTC Heater 1
36
PTC Heater 3
37
Air Conditioning
Inverter
Tires
CAUTION
Your new vehicle comes
with high-quality tires made
by a leading tire manufacturer.
If you ever have questions about
your tire warranty and where to
obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details.
For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
{ CAUTION
Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
• Overloading your
vehicle’s tires can cause
overheating as a result
of too much flexing. You
could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See
Loading the Vehicle on
page 8-32.
(Continued)
9-41
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose
the same danger as
overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could
cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are
cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 9-47.
• Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when
you hit a pothole. Keep
tires at the recommended
pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause
accidents. If the tire’s tread
is badly worn, or if your
vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
9-42
Vehicle Service and Care
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a
tire is molded into its sidewall.
The examples show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a
compact spare tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size
is a combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire’s width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(B) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that the tire
is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
Example
(C) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN
is molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(D) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies
in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(E) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required
to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading
on page 9-56.
(F) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed
to support that load.
Vehicle Service and Care
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies
in the sidewall and under
the tread.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The
compact spare tire or temporary
use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) and should not be
driven at speeds over 65 mph
(105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a
regular road tire has lost air and
gone flat. If your vehicle has a
compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 9-70 and If a
Tire Goes Flat on page 9-61.
(C) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the
Tire Identification Number (TIN).
The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only
one side may have the date of
manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum
pressure needed to support
that load.
9-43
(E) Tire Inflation: The
temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated
to 60 psi (420 kPa). For more
information on tire pressure and
inflation see Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 9-47.
(F) Tire Size : A combination
of letters and numbers define a
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
9-44
Vehicle Service and Care
Tire Size
The following illustration
shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association. Tires
engineered to European
standards do not use the
letter P as the first character
in the tire size.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit
number that indicates the tire
height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter
code is used to indicate the type
of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply
construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carry capacity a tire is
certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum
speed a tire is certified to carry
a load. Speed ratings range
from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward
on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means
the combined weight of optional
accessories. Some examples
of optional accessories are,
automatic transmission, power
steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Vehicle Service and Care
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire’s height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between the
plies and the tread. Cords may
be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the plies are laid
at alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline
of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa)
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 9-47.
Curb Weight: The weight of
a motor vehicle with standard
and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel,
oil, and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code
molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is
in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 8-32.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle
Weight Rating for the front axle.
See Loading the Vehicle on
page 8-32.
9-45
GAWR RR: Gross Axle
Weight Rating for the rear axle.
See Loading the Vehicle on
page 8-32.
Intended Outboard Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:
A tire used on light duty trucks
and some multipurpose
passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure
to which a cold tire can
be inflated. The maximum
air pressure is molded onto
the sidewall.
9-46
Vehicle Service and Care
Maximum Load Rating:
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight: The sum of curb weight,
accessory weight, vehicle
capacity weight, and production
options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading
the Vehicle on page 8-32.
Occupant Distribution:
Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white
lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name
molding that is higher or deeper
than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks
and multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended
tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 9-47 and Loading the
Vehicle on page 8-32.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating
the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the tread
of a tire when only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 9-54.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards): A tire
information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a
tire’s traction, temperature,
and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing
procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the
tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 9-56.
Vehicle Service and Care
Vehicle Capacity Weight:
The number of designated
seating positions multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated
cargo load. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 8-32.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s
capacity weight and the
original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation
pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label”
under Loading the Vehicle
on page 8-32.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount
of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell
you that under-inflation or
over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have
enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air
(over-inflation), you can get
the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road
hazards
9-47
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to your vehicle. This
label shows your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the
label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load
carrying capacity.
For additional information
regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Loading
the Vehicle on page 8-32.
How you load your vehicle
affects vehicle handling and
ride comfort. Never load your
vehicle with more weight than
it was designed to carry.
9-48
Vehicle Service and Care
When to Check
Check your tires once a month
or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare tire,
it should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
For additional information
regarding the compact spare
tire, see Compact Spare Tire
on page 9-70.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type
gage to check tire pressure.
You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they are under-inflated. Check
the tire’s inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air
until you reach the recommended
amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air
by pushing on the metal stem
in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with
the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps
back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by
keeping out dirt and moisture.
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your vehicle’s
tires and transmit tire pressure
readings to a receiver located
in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
Vehicle Service and Care
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on
a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is
not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
9-49
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 9-50 for
additional information.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause
harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
9-50
Vehicle Service and Care
This could be an early indicator that
the air pressure in the tire(s) are
getting low and need to be inflated
to the proper pressure.
The TPMS operates on a radio
frequency and complies with
RSS-210 of Industry and Science
Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause
interference.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to
this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) warns the driver when a low
tire pressure condition exists. TPMS
sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly, excluding the
spare tire and wheel assembly.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the low tire pressure
warning light, located on the
instrument panel cluster, comes on.
This light also comes on for a
few seconds and then goes off when
you turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
This indicates the TPMS is
functioning properly. If the low-tire
pressure warning light comes on
while driving the vehicle, the system
may have detected a low-tire
condition. You need to stop as soon
as possible and check the tires.
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and
then turn off as you start to drive.
A Tire and Loading Information
label, attached to the vehicle, shows
the size of the vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for the tires when
they are cold. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 8-32, for an
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label and its location on
your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 9-47.
The vehicle’s TPMS can warn you
about a low tire pressure condition
but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 and Tires
on page 9-41.
Vehicle Service and Care
TPMS Malfunction Light
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
about one minute and then stays
on for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. The low tire warning light
comes on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of
the conditions that can cause the
malfunction light to come on are:
• One of the road tires has been
replaced with the spare tire. The
spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message should go
off once you re-install the road tire
containing the TPMS sensor.
• The initialization (reset) procedure
failed. See “TPMS Reset” later in
this section.
• One or more TPMS sensors
are missing or damaged.
The TPMS malfunction light
should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the
sensor matching process is
performed successfully. See
your dealer/retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do
not match the vehicle’s original
equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those
recommended for your vehicle
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 9-54.
9-51
• Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
• If tire chains are installed on the
vehicle.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice
around the wheels or wheel
housings.
• If a window tint that affects the
radio wave signals is installed.
If the TPMS is not functioning it
cannot detect or signal a low tire
condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light
comes on and stays on.
9-52
Vehicle Service and Care
TPMS Reset
The TPMS sensors and transmitters
have unique identification codes.
Anytime you replace a TPMS sensor
or transmitter the identification codes
need to be registered and the TPMS
needs to be reset (initialized). When
the system is initialized, the current
air pressure in the tires is set as the
tire pressure benchmark. The tire
pressure warning system determines
decreased air pressure by comparing
tire pressure to the benchmark
pressure stored in the TPMS.
3. Adjust the tire pressure of all the
installed tires to the specified
cold tire inflation pressure level
indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label attached to
the vehicle.
4. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
If you press the tire pressure reset
switch while the vehicle is moving,
the reset is not performed. If you
press the tire pressure reset switch
accidentally and initialization is
performed, adjust the tire pressure
to the specified level and perform
the reset procedure again.
Do not reset the TPMS without first
correcting the cause of a low-tire
condition.
To reset the system:
1. Park the vehicle at a safe place
and apply the parking brake.
Turn the engine off.
2. Turn the ignition to
ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF.
Wait for a few minutes with the
ignition in ON/RUN, and then turn
the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY
or LOCK/OFF.
If the low-tire pressure warning
light does not flash three times
while you press and hold the
reset button, the reset has failed.
Repeat the reset process. If the
reset cannot be performed, see
your dealer/retailer for service.
5. Press and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light flashes
slowly on/off three times.
Vehicle Service and Care
Tire Inspection and
Rotation
Tires on page 9-54 and Wheel
Replacement on page 9-59 for
more information.
We recommend that you
regularly inspect the vehicle’s
tires, including the spare tire, for
signs of wear or damage. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 9-54 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every
5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to
13 000 km). See Part A:
Scheduled Maintenance
Services on page 11-3.
The purpose of a regular tire
rotation is to achieve a uniform
wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle
continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon
as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New
9-53
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 9-47 and Loading the
Vehicle on page 8-32.
{ CAUTION
When rotating the vehicle’s tires,
always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Tires should only be moved from
front to rear and rear to front on
the same side of the vehicle.
Do not include the compact
spare tire in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated,
adjust the front and rear inflation
pressures to the amounts
shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on
the parts to which it is fastened,
can make wheel nuts become
loose after time. The wheel
could come off and cause an
accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt
from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do
this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if
needed, to get all the rust or
dirt off. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 9-62.
Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications
on page 10-2.
9-54
Vehicle Service and Care
When It Is Time for New
Tires
Various factors, such as
maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading,
and road conditions influence
when you need new tires.
You need new tires if any of the
following statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at
three or more places around
the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric
showing through the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked,
cut, or snagged deep enough to
show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or
other damage that cannot be
repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
One way to tell when it is time for
new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which will appear
when the tires have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
The rubber in tires degrades over
time, even if they are not being used.
This is also true for the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one. Multiple
conditions affect how fast this aging
takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation
pressure maintenance. With proper
care and maintenance tires typically
wear out before they degrade due to
age. If you are unsure about the
need to replace the tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer
for more information.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for the vehicle. If you
need replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires that
are the same size, brand, load range,
speed rating, and construction type
(radial and bias-belted tires) as the
vehicle’s original tires. This way, the
vehicle will continue to have tires
that are designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original
tires. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 9-42 for additional information.
Vehicle Service and Care
GM recommends replacing tires
in sets of four. This is because
uniform tread depth on all tires will
help keep the vehicle performing
most like it did when the tires were
new. Replacing less than a full set
of tires can affect the braking and
handling performance of the vehicle.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 9-53.
{ CAUTION
Mixing tires could cause you to
lose control while driving. If you
mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires), the vehicle
may not handle properly, and
you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes, brands,
or types may also cause
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
damage to the vehicle.
Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires
on all wheels. It is all right
to drive with the compact
spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on the
vehicle. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 9-70.
{ CAUTION
If you use bias-ply tires on the
vehicle, the wheel rim flanges
could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail
suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
9-55
Vehicles that have a tire pressure
monitoring system could give
an inaccurate low-pressure warning
if tires not recommended for the
vehicle are installed. Tires that do
not match the original equipment
tires could give a low-pressure
warning that is higher or lower
than the proper warning level you
would get with original equipment
tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 9-48.
The vehicle’s original equipment
tires are listed on the Tire and
Loading Information Label. See
Loading the Vehicle on page 8-32,
for more information about the
Tire and Loading Information label
and its location on the vehicle.
9-56
Vehicle Service and Care
Different Size Tires and
Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are
a different size than your original
equipment wheels and tires, this
may affect the way your vehicle
performs, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as, antilock
brakes, traction control, and
electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems
can be affected.
{ CAUTION
If you add different sized
wheels, your vehicle may not
provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and
suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems
developed for your vehicle, and
have them properly installed by
a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 9-54
and Accessories and Modifications
on page 9-3 for additional
information.
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum selection width.
For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
Unites States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires
by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance.
This applies only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
Vehicle Service and Care
The grades are molded on
the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire
Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep
tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary
with respect to these grades,
they must also conform to
federal safety requirements.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on
a specified government test
course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and
a half (11⁄2) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices,
and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
9-57
Traction — AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor
traction performance.
{ WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
9-58
Vehicle Service and Care
Temperature — A, B, C
The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
{ WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire
that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either
separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and
Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle
were aligned and balanced carefully
at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and
tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your
vehicle pulling to one side or the
other, the alignment might need to be
checked. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, the tires and wheels might
need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Vehicle Service and Care
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked or badly rusted or corroded.
If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel
nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except
some aluminum wheels, which can
sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these
conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the
kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have
the same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset and be
mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of the
wheels, wheel bolts or wheel
nuts, replace them only with new
GM original equipment parts.
This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts for the vehicle.
{ CAUTION
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control.
You could have a collision in
which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts for replacement.
9-59
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration, headlamp
aim, bumper height, vehicle
ground clearance, and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and
chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 9-62 for more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{ CAUTION
Putting a used wheel on the
vehicle is dangerous. You cannot
know how it has been used
or how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause
a crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
9-60
Vehicle Service and Care
Tire Chains
CAUTION
{ CAUTION
If the vehicle has P215/45R18
size tires, do not use tire chains.
There is not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of
clearance can cause damage to
the brakes, suspension or other
vehicle parts. The area damaged
by the tire chains could cause you
to lose control of the vehicle and
you or others may be injured in a
crash.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to the
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust
or remove the device if it is
contacting the vehicle, and
do not spin the wheels.
If you do find traction devices that
will fit, install them on the front
tires.
Notice: If the vehicle has a tire
size other than P215/45R18 size
tires, use tire chains only where
legal and only when you must.
Use only SAE Class “S” type
chains that are the proper size for
the tires. Install them on the front
tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow
the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting the vehicle,
stop and retighten them. If the
contact continues, slow down
until it stops. Driving too fast or
spinning the wheels with chains
on will damage the vehicle.
Vehicle Service and Care
Tire Changing
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while you are driving, especially if
you maintain your vehicle’s tires
properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a
blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop well out of
the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any
rear blowout remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. Get the
vehicle under control by steering the
way you want the vehicle to go. It
may be very bumpy and noisy, but
you can still steer. Gently brake to a
stop, well off the road if possible.
9-61
{ CAUTION
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs is
dangerous without the appropriate
safety equipment and training. If a
jack is provided with the vehicle, it
is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything
else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips
off the jack. If a jack is provided
with the vehicle, only use it for
changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part
shows how to use the jacking
equipment to change a flat tire
safely.
9-62
Vehicle Service and Care
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 4-3.
{ CAUTION
Changing a tire can be dangerous.
The vehicle can slip off the jack
and roll over or fall on you or other
people. You and they could be
badly injured or even killed. Find
a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from
moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic
transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse).
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
To be certain the vehicle will not
move, put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from
the one being changed. That
would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
When you have a flat tire, use the
following example as a guide to
assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
The following information tells you
how to use the jack and change
a tire.
Vehicle Service and Care
Removing the Spare Tire
and Tools
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Compact Spare Tire
Jack
Cargo Area Floor(s)
Tire/Wheel Retainer Nut
Jack Handle
Wheel Wrench
9-63
To remove the spare tire and tools:
1. Turn the two lock knobs on the
cargo area floor (C) to UNLOCK.
2. Lift up and remove the both
of the cargo area floors (C).
3. Remove the hook holding the
jack (B) and remove the jack (B).
4. Remove the jack handle (E)
and wheel wrench (F) from
the passenger side of the
cargo area.
9-64
Vehicle Service and Care
Removing the Flat Tire
and Installing the
Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 9-62.
5. Remove the tire/wheel
retainer (D) from the compact
spare tire (A) and remove
the compact spare tire (A).
See Compact Spare Tire on
page 9-70.
6. Place the compact spare tire (A)
next to the flat tire.
2. If the vehicle has steel wheels
with plastic wheel nut caps,
loosen the plastic wheel
nut caps. You may need the
wheel wrench to loosen them.
Do not pry off wheel covers that
have plastic wheel nut caps.
3. Remove the wheel cover and set
it off to the side.
4. Attach the jack handle to the jack
and turn clockwise to raise the
lift head a little.
5. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-65
{ CAUTION
Getting under a vehicle when it
is jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack you could
be badly injured or killed. Never
get under a vehicle when it is
supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION
6. Position the jack and raise the
jack lift head to fit over the car
flange between the two notches.
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage
the vehicle and even make the
vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be
sure to fit the jack lift head into the
proper location before raising the
vehicle.
7. Turn the jack handle clockwise.
Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough
room for the compact spare tire
to fit underneath the wheel well.
9-66
Vehicle Service and Care
{ CAUTION
8. Remove the wheel nuts and the
flat tire.
9. Install the spare tire.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper
or wire brush later, if needed,
to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 9-62.
10. Remove any rust or dirt from
the wheel bolts, mounting
surfaces and spare wheel.
11. Place the compact spare tire on
the wheel-mounting surface.
{ CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
Vehicle Service and Care
12. Reinstall the wheel nuts with
the rounded end of the nuts
toward the wheel. Tighten each
nut by hand until the wheel
is held against the hub.
13. Turn the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower
the jack completely.
9-67
{ CAUTION
Incorrect or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off.
This could lead to a crash. If you
have to replace them, be sure to
get new original equipment wheel
nuts. Stop somewhere as soon
as you can and have the nuts
tightened with a torque wrench to
the proper torque specification.
See Capacities and Specifications
on page 10-2 for wheel nut torque
specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification.
See Capacities and Specifications
on page 10-2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
in a crisscross sequence as
shown.
9-68
Vehicle Service and Care
Storing a Flat or Spare
Tire and Tools
2. Place the jack (B) back in its
original location on the driver
side of the cargo area and close
the latch over the jack (B).
Storing the Compact
Spare Tire
3. Place the compact spare tire (A),
valve stem pointed down, back
in its original location in the
center of the cargo area.
{ CAUTION
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
4. Turn the tire/wheel retainer
nut (D) clockwise to secure it
on the compact spare tire (A).
A. Compact Spare Tire
(Valve Stem Pointed Down)
B. Jack
C. Cargo Area Floor
D. Tire/Wheel Retainer Nut
E. Jack Handle
F. Wheel Wrench
1. Place the jack handle (E) and
wheel wrench (F) back in their
original location in the passenger
side of the cargo area.
5. Close the cargo area floor (C).
Storing the Full-Size Flat Tire
{ CAUTION
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
Vehicle Service and Care
The standard tire cannot be
stored in the compact spare tire
storage area.
9-69
4. Hook the end closest to the
buckle, to the front cargo hooks.
To store the standard flat tire:
1. If your vehicle has aluminum
wheels, remove the center wheel
cap before storing the flat tire.
2. Place the flat tire on the rear
cargo area floor panel with
the valve stem facing up.
6. Attach the other end of the
straps to the cargo hooks.
5. Pass the straps through the
center hole of the wheel.
7. Position the tire edge against the
rear center end of the floor panel.
Pull the end of the straps to make
sure the tire is secure.
Store the compact spare tire
properly after use.
3. Use the tire tie-down straps
located under the floor panel
to secure the flat tire.
9-70
Vehicle Service and Care
Compact Spare Tire
The compact spare tire was fully
inflated when the vehicle was new,
it can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly.
It should be 60 psi (414 kPa).
Return the jack and tools to the left
side of the compartment after use.
After installing the compact spare
on your vehicle, you should stop as
soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated.
The compact spare is intended to
perform well at speeds up to 50 mph
(80 km/h), so you can finish your trip
and have your full-size tire repaired
or replaced where you want. Replace
your spare with a full-size tire as
soon as you can.
Notice: When the compact spare
is installed, do not take the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact
spare can get caught on the rails
which can damage the tire, wheel
and other parts of the vehicle.
Do not use your compact spare on
other vehicles.
Do not mix your compact spare
tire or wheel with other wheels or
tires. Keep your spare tire and
its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not
fit the compact spare. Using
them can damage the vehicle
and can damage the chains too.
Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare.
Vehicle Service and Care
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run
down, you may want to use another
vehicle and some jumper cables
to start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
{ CAUTION
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can
burn you.
• They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
• They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage
to your vehicle that would not
be covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle
by pushing or pulling it will
not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s
system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only
use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump
start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can reach,
but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they are, it
could cause a ground connection
you do not want. You would not
be able to start your vehicle, and
the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
9-71
To avoid the possibility of the
vehicles rolling, set the parking
brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start
procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or
a manual transmission in
NEUTRAL before setting
the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave the radio
or other accessories on during
the jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off
the radio and other accessories
when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter. Turn off the radio
and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help
save both batteries. And it could
save the radio!
9-72
Vehicle Service and Care
4. Open the hoods and locate the
batteries. Find the positive (+)
and negative (−) terminal
locations on each vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview
on page 9-6 for more information
on location.
{ CAUTION
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION
Using a match near a battery can
cause battery gas to explode.
People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use
a flashlight if you need more light.
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is
low, add water to take care of
that first. If you don’t, explosive
gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
{ CAUTION
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables
do not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables,
here are some basic things you
should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a short
that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And
do not connect the negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal
on the dead battery because this
can cause sparks.
Vehicle Service and Care
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
7. Do not let the other end
touch metal. Connect it to the
positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
1.8 L4 Engine
8. To access the remote negative
on the 1.8L engine, the cover
will need to be removed.
To remove the engine cover
raise the rear of the engine cover
to remove the rear clips and
the front of the engine cover
to remove the two front clips
9-73
2.4L L4 Engine
Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to the negative
terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step.
The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to
a remote negative (−) terminal on
the vehicle with the dead battery.
9-74
Vehicle Service and Care
To disconnect the jumper cables
from both vehicles, do the following:
9. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) cable at least
18 inches (45 cm) away from the
dead battery, but not near engine
parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there,
and the chance of sparks getting
back to the battery is much less.
1. Disconnect the black negative (−)
cable from the vehicle that had
the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the
good battery and run the
engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper
cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do not
touch each other or other metal.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal
Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.
Vehicle Service and Care
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled
vehicle should be towed with all
four wheels off the ground. Consult
your dealer/retailer or a professional
towing service if the disabled vehicle
must be towed. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 12-5.
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes
(such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing”
following.
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means
towing your vehicle behind another
vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common
types of recreational vehicle towing
are known as “dinghy towing” (towing
your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels
on the ground and two wheels up on
a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and
equipment, many vehicles can be
towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,”
following.
Here are some important things to
consider before you do recreational
vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity
of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow
vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how
far and how long they can tow.
9-75
• Do you have the proper towing
equipment? See your dealer/
retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and
equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed?
Just as you would prepare your
vehicle for a long trip, you will
want to make sure your vehicle
is prepared to be towed. See
“Before Leaving On A Long Trip”
in the Index.
Dinghy Towing
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, it cannot be dinghy
towed. See “Dolly Towing” for
more information regarding
towing your vehicle.
If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, it can be dinghy
towed.
9-76
Vehicle Service and Care
Dolly Towing
(Front-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles Only)
When dinghy towing, be sure to
follow the posted legal speed limit.
1. Put the shift lever in Neutral.
2. Turn the ignition to
ACC/ACCESSORY to avoid
locking the steering wheel.
Make sure the audio system
is turned off and that nothing is
plugged into the power outlets.
3. Release the parking brake.
After dinghy towing, let the engine
idle for more than three minutes
before driving the vehicle.
Do not tow your vehicle from
the rear. Your vehicle could be badly
damaged and the repairs would
not be covered by your warranty.
Dolly Towing
(All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
All-wheel-drive vehicles must not
be towed with two wheels on the
ground. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed
on a platform trailer with all four
wheels off of the ground.
To tow your front-wheel-drive
vehicle using a dolly, follow
these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park)
for an automatic transmission
or Neutral for a manual
transmission.
3. Set the parking brake.
Vehicle Service and Care
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a
straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed
for towing.
5. Remove the key from the
ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
Towing a Trailer
{ CAUTION
The driver can lose control when
pulling a trailer if the correct
equipment is not used or the
vehicle is not driven properly.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well or even at all. The driver and
passengers could be seriously
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have
been followed. Ask your
dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer
with the vehicle.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it
is equipped with the proper trailer
towing equipment. To identify the
vehicle trailering capacity of your
vehicle, you should read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving
your vehicle by itself. Trailering
means changes in handling,
9-77
acceleration, braking, durability and
fuel economy. Successful, safe
trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
That is the reason for this part.
In it are many time-tested, important
trailering tips and safety rules. Many
of these are important for your safety
and that of your passengers.
So please read this section
carefully before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as
the engine, transmission, wheel
assemblies and tires are forced to
work harder against the drag of
the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater
loads, generating extra heat.
In addition, the trailer adds
considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
9-78
Vehicle Service and Care
If You Do Decide To Pull A
Trailer
If you do, here are some important
points:
• There are many different laws,
including speed limit restrictions,
having to do with trailering. Make
sure the rig will be legal, not only
where you live but also where you
will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or
provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control.
Ask a hitch dealer about sway
controls.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during
the first 1,000 miles (1 600 km)
the new vehicle is driven. The
engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles
(800 km) that trailer is towed, do
not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions
when towing a trailer. Do not drive
faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than
55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear
on the vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have
to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on your
vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than
1,500 lbs (680 kg). But even
that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to
use your rig. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your
vehicle is used to pull a trailer are
all important. It can also depend on
any special equipment that you have
on your vehicle, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more
information.
Vehicle Service and Care
Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in the tow
vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight
of additional optional equipment,
passengers and cargo in the tow
vehicle must be subtracted from
the maximum trailer weight.
And if you tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will be carrying that
weight, too. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 8-32 for more information
about your vehicle’s maximum load
capacity.
After the trailer is loaded, weigh
the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they are not, you may
be able to get them right simply
by moving some items around in
the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s
Tires
You can ask your dealer/retailer for
our trailering information or advice,
or you can write us at our Customer
Assistance Offices. See Customer
Assistance Offices on page 12-4 for
more information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer
is an important weight to measure
because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo
you may carry in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
9-79
If using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are
inflated to the upper limit for cold
tires. These numbers are located on
the Tire and Loading Information
label located on the vehicle’s center
pillar (B-pillar). See Loading the
Vehicle on page 8-32. Then be sure
you do not go over the GVW limit
for your vehicle, including the weight
of the trailer tongue.
9-80
Vehicle Service and Care
Hitches
Safety Chains
Driving with a Trailer
It is important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds,
large trucks going by and rough
roads are a few reasons why
you will need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your
trailer. Cross the safety chains
under the tongue of the trailer
so that the tongue will not drop
to the road if it becomes separated
from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided
by the hitch manufacturer or by
the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Leave
sufficient slack in the chain for turns.
Never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Get to know
the rig before setting out for the open
road. Acquaint yourself with the feel
of handling and braking with the
added weight of the trailer. And
always keep in mind that the vehicle
you are driving is now a good deal
longer and not nearly as responsive
as your vehicle is by itself.
• Do not let the steel in a hitch
contact the aluminum on your
bumper because it can corrode.
Use something like paint or plastic
tape to separate the steel and
aluminum. The same steel to
aluminum problem can happen
with fasteners too.
• Will you have to make any holes
in the body of your vehicle when
you install a trailer hitch? If you
do, then be sure to seal the holes
later when you remove the hitch.
If you do not seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from the
exhaust can get into your vehicle.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the
Index. Dirt and water can too.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own
brakes?
Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so
you will be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly. If you have
antilock brakes, do not tap into your
vehicle’s brake system. If you do,
both systems will not work well,
or at all.
Before you start, check the trailer
hitch, platform and attachments,
safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment.
If the trailer has electric brakes, start
your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller
by hand to be sure the brakes
are working. This lets you check
your electrical connection at the
same time.
During your trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lamps and any
trailer brakes are still working.
Vehicle Service and Care
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause
the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. The vehicle could
be damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When you are turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal.
Do this so your trailer will not strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,
trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
More distance in front is needed to
pass when towing a trailer. And,
because the tow vehicle and trailer
are longer, you will need to go
farther beyond the passed vehicle
before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, just move that
hand to the left. To move the trailer
to the right, move your hand to the
right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Turn Signals When Towing a
Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle
may need a different turn signal
flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer/retailer. The arrows
on the instrument panel flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other
drivers you are about to turn, change
lanes or stop.
9-81
When towing a trailer, the arrows
on the instrument panel will flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think
drivers behind you are seeing your
signal when they are not. It is
important to check occasionally to be
sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get
hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce your speed to around
45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of the engine and the
transmission overheating.
9-82
Vehicle Service and Care
Parking on Hills
{ CAUTION
Parking the vehicle on a hill
with the trailer attached can be
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
To park your rig on a hill:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but
do not shift into P (Park) for an
automatic transmission or into
gear for a manual transmission,
yet. When parking uphill, turn
your wheels away from the curb.
When parking downhill, turn your
wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
3. When the chocks are in place,
release the regular brakes until
the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes.
Then apply your parking
brake and shift into P (Park)
for an automatic transmission
or R (Reverse) for a manual
transmission.
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave
After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and
hold the pedal down while you:
• start your engine
• shift the transmission
into gear
• release the parking brake
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer
Towing
Your vehicle will need service more
often when you are pulling a trailer.
See the Maintenance Schedule
for more on this. Things that are
especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission
fluid (do not overfill), engine oil, drive
belt, cooling system and brake
system. Each of these is covered in
this manual, and the Index will help
find them quickly. If you are trailering,
it is a good idea to review this
information before starting your trip.
Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer
Towing
The cooling system could
temporarily overheat during severe
operating conditions. See Engine
Overheating on page 9-22.
Vehicle Service and Care
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue
to look its best if it is cleaned often.
Although not always visible, dust
and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet,
fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended
to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep
your upholstery from becoming and
remaining heavily soiled. Soils
should be removed as quickly as
possible. Your vehicle’s interior may
experience extremes of heat that
could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require
more frequent cleaning. Use care
because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer
color to your vehicle’s interior.
9-83
When cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, only use cleaners specifically
designed for the surfaces being
cleaned. Permanent damage may
result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not
intended. Use glass cleaner only
on glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces
immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning
cloth.
maintain adequate ventilation by
opening your vehicle’s doors and
windows.
Notice: If you use abrasive
cleaners when cleaning glass
surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or
cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass
on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
Do not clean your vehicle using the
following cleaners or techniques:
Many cleaners contain solvents that
may become concentrated in your
vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to
all safety instructions on the label.
While cleaning your vehicle’s interior,
Dust may be removed from small
buttons and knobs using a small
brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for
cleaning your vehicle’s glass. You
can also obtain a product from your
dealer/retailer to remove odors from
your vehicle’s upholstery.
• Never use a knife or any
other sharp object to remove a
soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can
cause damage to your vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or
rub aggressively with a cleaning
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage the interior and does not
improve the effectiveness of soil
removal.
9-84
Vehicle Service and Care
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Avoid laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much
soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per gallon (3.78 L)
of water is a good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery while cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior
may result from the use of many
organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a
soft brush attachment frequently
to remove dust and loose dirt.
A canister vacuum with a beater bar
in the nozzle may only be used on
floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
For soils, always try to remove them
first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as
much of the soil as possible using
one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the
remaining soil with a paper towel.
Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be
removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
To clean, use the following
instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
cloth with water or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess
moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled
area until the cleaning cloth
remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with
plain water.
Vehicle Service and Care
If any of the soil remains, a
commercial fabric cleaner or spot
lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or
spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first.
If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been
completed, a paper towel can be
used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with
water can be used to remove dust.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather.
Never use spot lifters or spot
removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and
feel of your leather and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those
containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by
increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on
leather.
9-85
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water
may be used to remove dust.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or
removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance
and feel of your interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those
containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by
increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on your instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
9-86
Vehicle Service and Care
Exterior Cleaning
Cleaning Exterior
Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth and a car washing soap to
clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
Your Vehicle” later in this section.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of your vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue
from the paint finish. You can
get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth
and gloss to the colored basecoat.
Always use waxes and polishes that
are non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding
or aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on your
vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium
chloride and other salts, ice melting
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject
to aging, weather and chemical
fallout that can take their toll over
a period of years. You can help to
keep the paint finish looking new by
keeping your vehicle garaged or
covered whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
Bright metal parts should be
cleaned regularly to keep their
luster. Wash with water or
use chrome polish on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum
trim. To avoid damaging protective
trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to
clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal
parts.
Vehicle Service and Care
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your
vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by
washing it often.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight. Use a car washing soap.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain
chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on your vehicle
or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid
or abrasives, as they can damage
the paint, metal or plastic on your
vehicle. Approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your dealer/
retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety precautions
and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and
water spotting.
9-87
High pressure car washes may
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to
the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
During very cold, damp weather
frequent application may be required.
See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Index of the “Maintenance and
Warranty and Owner assistance
Information” manual.
9-88
Vehicle Service and Care
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
Your vehicle may have either
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a
soft clean cloth with mild soap and
water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a
soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and
other chrome trim may be
damaged if you do not wash your
vehicle after driving on roads
that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium
chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions
such as ice and dust. Always
wash your vehicle’s chrome with
soap and water after exposure.
Notice: If you use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels,
you could damage the surface of
the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
The surface of these wheels is
similar to the painted surface of your
vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because you could damage
the surface. Do not use chrome
polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on
aluminum wheels could damage
the wheels. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome
wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on
chrome-plated wheels, but avoid
any painted surface of the wheel,
and buff off immediately after
application.
Notice: If you drive your
vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes,
you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The
repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Never drive a
vehicle equipped with aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels through
an automatic car wash that uses
silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes.
Vehicle Service and Care
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Tires
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush
with tire cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint
free cloth or paper towel soaked with
windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the blades.
Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup
of vehicle wash/wax treatments may
cause wiper streaking. Replace the
wiper blades if they are worn or
damaged.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on your
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Wipers can be damaged by:
•
•
•
•
Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper
removal
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
9-89
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining
the vehicle warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into
major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be
corrected in your dealer’s/retailer’s
body and paint shop.
9-90
Vehicle Service and Care
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts such
as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and
exhaust system even though they
have corrosion protection.
Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces
on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody
with plain water. Clean any areas
where mud and debris can collect.
Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before
being flushed. Your dealer/retailer
or an underbody car washing
system can do this for you.
Although no defect in the paint job
causes this, we will repair, at no
charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this
fallout condition within 12 months
or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
purchase, whichever occurs first.
Technical Data
Technical Data
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ..................10-1
Service Parts
Identification Label ...........10-1
Capacities and
Specifications
Capacities and
Specifications ..................10-2
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Maintenance
Replacement Parts ..........10-4
Engine Drive Belt
Routing ...........................10-5
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. It appears on a plate in
the front corner of the instrument
panel, on the driver side. It can
be seen through the windshield from
outside the vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification
and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is
the engine code. This code helps
identify the vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 10-2 for your vehicle’s
engine code.
10-1
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the
glove box. It is very helpful if
you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following
information:
• Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special
equipment
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
10-2
Technical Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11-18 for more information.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Capacities
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Cooling System
1.8L L4 Engine
5.8 qt
5.5 L
2.4L L4 Engine
6.0 qt
5.7 L
1.8L L4 Engine
4.4 qt
4.2 L
2.4L L4 Engine
4.5 qt
4.3 L
13.2 gal
50 L
1.8L L4 Engine
3.1 qt
2.9 L
2.4L L4 Engine
3.7 qt
3.5 L
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Transmission, Automatic (Complete Drain and Refill)
Technical Data
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
1.8L L4 Engine
2.0 qt
1.9 L
2.4L L4 Engine
2.6 qt
2.5 L
Wheel Nut Torque
76 lb ft
103 Y
Transmission, Manual (Complete Drain and Refill)
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
1.8L L4
8
Automatic
Manual
0.043 in (1.10 mm)
2.4L L4
0
Automatic
Manual
0.043 in (1.10 mm)
10-3
10-4
Technical Data
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
GM Part Numbers
Other Part Numbers
1.8L L4 Engine
88975792
—
2.4L L4 Engine
88975799
—
1.8L L4 Engine*
19185485
—
2.4L L4 Engine
88969580
—
19184673
—
1.8L L4 Engine
19185438
SK20HR11†
2.4L L4 Engine
88969636
SK20R11†
IFR6A11††
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs**
*Oil Filter Element Kit includes element and seal.
**The engine is fitted with iridium-tipped spark plugs. Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs for better engine
performance.
† DENSO
†† NGK
Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt
Routing
2.4L L4 Engine
1.8L L4 Engine
The 1.8L L4 engine drive belt
requires the use of a special kind
of tool to service. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
10-5
10-6
Technical Data
✍ NOTES
Service and Maintenance
Service and
Maintenance
Service and Maintenance
Introduction .......................11-1
Maintenance
Requirements ..................11-2
Your Vehicle and the
Environment ....................11-2
How This Section is
Organized .......................11-2
Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services ......11-3
Using the Maintenance
Schedule .........................11-3
Scheduled Maintenance ....11-4
Part B: Owner Checks
and Services .................11-12
At Each Fuel Fill .............11-12
At Least Once a Month ...11-13
At Least Twice a Year ....11-13
At Least Once a Year .....11-13
Part C: Periodic
Maintenance
Inspections ....................11-16
Steering, Suspension and
Front Drive Axle Boot
and Seal Inspection .......11-16
Exhaust System
Inspection ......................11-16
Fuel System Inspection ...11-16
Engine Cooling System
Inspection ......................11-17
Throttle System
Inspection ......................11-17
Brake System
Inspection ......................11-17
Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants ....11-18
Part E: Maintenance
Record ..........................11-20
11-1
Service and
Maintenance
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at
the proper level and change as
recommended.
Have you purchased the GM
Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties.
See the Warranty and Owner
Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
11-2
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance
Requirements
How This Section is
Organized
Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections and recommended fluids
and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep this
vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to
follow scheduled maintenance
may not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
This maintenance schedule is
divided into five parts:
Your Vehicle and the
Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only
helps to keep the vehicle in good
working condition, but also helps
the environment. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the
quality of the air we breathe.
Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire
inflation can increase the level of
emissions from the vehicle. To help
protect the environment, and to keep
the vehicle in good condition, be sure
to maintain the vehicle properly.
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services” explains what to have
done and how often. Some of
these services can be complex,
so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary
equipment, you should let your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
Your dealer/retailer has trained
and supported service people
that will perform the work using
genuine parts.
{ CAUTION
Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be dangerous.
In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how and
the proper tools and equipment
for the job. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own
Service Work on page 9-4.
To purchase service information,
see Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 12-16.
“Part B: Owner Checks and
Services” tells what should be
checked and when. It also explains
what can easily be done to help
keep the vehicle in good condition.
Service and Maintenance
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” explains important
inspections that your dealer/retailer
can perform for you.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” lists some
recommended products necessary
to help keep the vehicle properly
maintained. These products, or
their equivalents, should be used
whether you do the work yourself
or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a
place to record and keep track of
the maintenance performed on
the vehicle. Keep the maintenance
receipts. They may be needed
to qualify the vehicle for warranty
repairs.
Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services
In this part are scheduled
maintenance services which are
to be performed at the mileage
intervals specified.
Using the Maintenance
Schedule
We want to help keep this vehicle in
good working condition. But we do
not know exactly how you will drive it.
You might drive short distances only
a few times a week. Or you might
drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You might
use the vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you might drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
11-3
Because of the different ways
people use their vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. You might
need more frequent checks and
replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive.
If you have questions on how to keep
the vehicle in good condition, see
your dealer/retailer.
This part tells you the maintenance
services that should be done
and when to schedule them.
When you go to your dealer/retailer
for service, trained and supported
service people will perform the work
using genuine parts.
11-4
Service and Maintenance
The proper fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Part D. Make
sure whoever services the vehicle
uses these. All parts should be
replaced and all necessary repairs
done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for
vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 8-32.
• are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on
page 8-36.
Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule
up to 120,000 miles (192 000 km)
should be repeated after
120,000 miles (192 000 km) at the
same intervals for the life of this
vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and
Services on page 11-12, Part C:
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
on page 11-16, and Part D:
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-18.
Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency or the California Air
Resources Board has determined
that the failure to perform this
maintenance item will not nullify the
emissions warranty or limit recall
liability prior to the completion of the
vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended
maintenance services be performed
at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+ A good time to check your brakes
is during tire rotation. See Brake
System Inspection on page 11-17.
5,000 Miles (8 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 for
proper rotation pattern and
additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
10,000 Miles (16 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
Service and Maintenance
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53
for proper rotation pattern
and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
15,000 Miles (24 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 for
proper rotation pattern and
additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
❑ Inspect passenger compartment
air filter.
20,000 Miles (32 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 for
proper rotation pattern and
additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
25,000 Miles (40 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 for
proper rotation pattern and
additional information.
(See footnote +.)
11-5
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
30,000 Miles (48 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 for
proper rotation pattern and
additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter
(or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 9-12 for
more information.
11-6
Service and Maintenance
❑ Check restraint system. Make
sure the safety belt reminder
light and safety belt assemblies
are working properly. Look for
any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep
a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety
belts replaced. Also see
Airbag System Check on
page 1-35.
❑ Replace passenger compartment
air filter.
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap
gasket, and lines for damage
or leaks (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first). Replace
parts as needed. An Emission
Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Change manual transmission
fluid every 30,000 miles
(48 000 km) only if your vehicle
is used to tow a trailer.
35,000 Miles (56 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 for
proper rotation pattern and
additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
40,000 Miles (64 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 for
proper rotation pattern and
additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
45,000 Miles (72 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 for
proper rotation pattern and
additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
❑ Inspect passenger compartment
air filter.
50,000 Miles (80 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
Service and Maintenance
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 for
proper rotation pattern and
additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
55,000 Miles (88 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 for
proper rotation pattern and
additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
60,000 Miles (96 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 for
proper rotation pattern and
additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter
(or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 9-12
for more information.
❑ Check restraint system. Make
sure the safety belt reminder
light and safety belt assemblies
are working properly. Look for
any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep
a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety
belts replaced. Also see Airbag
System Check on page 1-35.
11-7
❑ Replace passenger compartment
air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive
belts (or every 48 months,
whichever occurs first). Visually
inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage.
Replace belt if necessary.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect for tappet noise and
engine vibration. Adjust valve
clearance to factory specifications
if necessary (or every 48 months,
whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket,
and lines for damage or leaks
(or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). Replace parts as
needed. An Emission Control
Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Change manual transmission fluid
every 30,000 miles (48 000 km)
only if your vehicle is used to tow
a trailer.
11-8
Service and Maintenance
❑ Change automatic transmission
fluid every 60,000 miles
(96 000 km) if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more
of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the
outside temperature regularly
reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer
towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi,
police, or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle
under any of these conditions, the
fluid does not require changing.
See Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11-18
for the proper fluid to use.
65,000 Miles 104 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 for
proper rotation pattern and
additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
70,000 Miles (112 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53
for proper rotation pattern
and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
75,000 Miles (120 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 for
proper rotation pattern and
additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
❑ Inspect passenger compartment
air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive
belts (or 12 months since last
inspection). An Emission
Control Service.
80,000 Miles (128 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
Service and Maintenance
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53
for proper rotation pattern
and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
85,000 Miles (136 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53
for proper rotation pattern
and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
90,000 Miles (144 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 for
proper rotation pattern and
additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter
(or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 9-12
for more information.
❑ Check restraint system. Make
sure the safety belt reminder
light and safety belt assemblies
are working properly. Look for
any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep
❑
❑
❑
❑
11-9
a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed
safety belts replaced. Also
see Airbag System Check on
page 1-35.
Replace passenger compartment
air filter.
Inspect engine accessory drive
belts (or 12 months since last
inspection). An Emission
Control Service.
Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap
gasket, and lines for damage
or leaks (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first). Replace
parts as needed. An Emission
Control Service. (See footnote †.)
Change manual transmission
fluid every 30,000 miles
(48 000 km) only if your vehicle
is used to tow a trailer.
11-10
Service and Maintenance
95,000 Miles (152 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53
for proper rotation pattern
and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
100,000 Miles (160 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53
for proper rotation pattern
and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
105,000 Miles (168 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53
for proper rotation pattern
and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
❑ Inspect passenger compartment
air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive
belts (or every 48 months,
whichever occurs first). Visually
inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage.
Replace belt if necessary.
An Emission Control Service.
110,000 Miles (176 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53
for proper rotation pattern
and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
Service and Maintenance
115,000 Miles (184 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53 for
proper rotation pattern and
additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter
if you are driving in dusty
conditions. Replace filter if
necessary.
120,000 Miles (192 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter
(or every 3 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission
Control Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 9-53
for proper rotation pattern
and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter
(or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 9-12
for more information.
❑ Replace passenger compartment
air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory
drive belts (or every 48 months,
whichever occurs first). Visually
inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage.
Replace belt if necessary.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect for tappet noise and
engine vibration. Adjust valve
clearance to factory specifications
if necessary (or every 48 months,
whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap
gasket, and lines for damage
or leaks (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first). Replace
parts as needed. An Emission
Control Service. (See footnote †.)
11-11
❑ Change manual transmission
fluid every 30,000 miles
(48 000 km) only if your vehicle
is used to tow a trailer.
❑ Change automatic transmission
fluid every 60,000 miles
(96 000 km) if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the
outside temperature regularly
reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer
towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi,
police, or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under
any of these conditions, the fluid
does not require changing.
See Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11-18
for the proper fluid to use.
11-12
Service and Maintenance
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
❑ Drain, flush, and refill the cooling
system (or every 5 years,
whichever occurs first).
This service can be complex;
you should have your dealer/
retailer perform this service.
See Engine Coolant on page 9-18
for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and neck. Pressure
test cooling system and pressure
cap. An Emission Control Service.
Part B: Owner Checks
and Services
These owner checks and services
should be performed at the intervals
specified to help ensure vehicle
safety, dependability, and emission
control performance.
Be sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once. Whenever
any fluids or lubricants are added to
the vehicle, make sure they are
the proper ones, as shown in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these
underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check
the engine oil regularly and keep it
at the proper level. Failure to keep
the engine oil at the proper level
can cause damage to the engine
not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add
the proper oil if necessary. See
Engine Oil on page 9-9.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level
and add DEX-COOL® coolant
mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 9-18.
Windshield Washer Fluid
Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid
level in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir and add the proper
fluid if necessary. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 9-24.
Hood Latch Operation Check
Pull the primary hood latch release
handle inside the vehicle. The
secondary latch should keep the
hood from opening all the way when
the primary latch is released. Make
sure the hood closes firmly.
See Hood Release on page 9-5.
Service and Maintenance
11-13
At Least Once a Month
Weatherstrip Lubrication
At Least Once a Year
Tire Inflation Check
Key Lock Cylinders Service
At Least Twice a Year
Silicone grease on weatherstrips
will make them last longer, seal
better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean
cloth. During very cold, damp
weather more frequent application
may be required. See Part D:
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-18.
Wiper Blade Check
Fluid Level Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear,
cracking, or contamination. Clean
the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper
blades that are worn or damaged.
See Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 9-25 and
Exterior Cleaning on page 9-86 for
more information.
Check the power steering pump,
rear axle, transfer case, and
automatic or manual transmission
fluid levels and add as needed.
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 9-14 or Manual
Transmission Fluid on page 9-16.
Check for leaks. A fluid loss in these
systems could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and
repaired at once.
Inspect the tires and make sure the
tires are inflated to the correct
pressures. Do not forget to check
the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 9-47.
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with
the lubricant specified in Part D.
Seat Operation Check
Make sure the head restraints stay
in position and all seat latches
lock. Check that the recliner holds
by pushing and pulling the seatback
while it is reclined.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring
anchor, release pawl, hood and body
door hinges, rear compartment, and
any folding seat hardware. Part D
tells you what to use. More frequent
lubrication might be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.
11-14
Service and Maintenance
Starter Switch Check
{ CAUTION
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could move
suddenly. If the vehicle moves,
you or others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Parking Brake on page 8-12.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it starts.
3. For automatic transmission
vehicles, try to start the engine in
each gear. The vehicle should
start only in P (Park) or
N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
For manual transmission
vehicles, put the shift lever
in Neutral, push the clutch pedal
down halfway, and try to start
the engine. The vehicle should
start only when the clutch
pedal is pushed down all the
way to the floor. If the vehicle
starts when the clutch pedal
is not pushed all the way down,
contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control System Check
{ CAUTION
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could move
suddenly. If the vehicle moves,
you or others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 8-12.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition to ON/RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without
applying the regular brake,
try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort.
If the shift lever moves out
of P (Park), contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
Service and Maintenance
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
• For automatic transmission
vehicles, the ignition should turn
to LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park).
• For manual transmission vehicles,
the ignition should turn to LOCK/
OFF only if you push the ignition
key in farther, while turning it
toward LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if
service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park)
Mechanism Check
{ CAUTION
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s
holding ability: With the engine
running and transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
11-15
• To check the P (Park)
mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if
service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain
water to flush any corrosive
materials from the underbody.
Take care to clean thoroughly
any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
11-16
Service and Maintenance
Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections
and services which should be
performed at least twice a year,
for instance, each spring and fall.
You should let your dealer/retailer
do these jobs. Make sure any
necessary repairs are completed
at once.
Proper procedures to perform these
services can be found in a service
manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 12-16.
Steering, Suspension
and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear
suspension and steering system for
damaged, loose, or missing parts
or signs of wear. Inspect power
steering cables for proper hook-up,
binding, cracks, chafing, etc.
Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage,
tears, or leakage. Replace seals
if necessary.
Exhaust System
Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust
system. Inspect the body near the
exhaust system. Look for broken,
damaged, missing, or out-of-position
parts as well as open seams, holes,
loose connections, or other
conditions which could cause a heat
build-up in the floor pan or could
let exhaust fumes into the vehicle.
See Engine Exhaust on page 8-16.
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for
damage or leaks.
Service and Maintenance
Engine Cooling System
Inspection
Throttle System
Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them
replaced if they are cracked, swollen
or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as
needed. Clean the outside of the
radiator and air conditioning
condenser. To help ensure proper
operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure
cap is recommended at least once
a year.
Inspect the throttle system for
interference or binding, and for
damaged or missing parts.
Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that
have high effort or excessive wear.
Do not lubricate accelerator and
cruise control cables.
11-17
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system.
Inspect brake lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc
brake pads for wear and rotors for
surface condition. Inspect other
brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc. You may need
to have your brakes inspected more
often if your driving habits or
conditions result in frequent braking.
11-18
Service and Maintenance
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine,
see Engine Oil on page 9-9.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 9-18.
Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield Washer Solvent
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Manual Transmission
GM Goodwrench® Synthetic Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346190, in Canada 10953477 — 1 quart) or
SAE 75W-90 GL-5 gear oil.
Automatic Transmission
Use only T-IV Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88900925,
in Canada 22689186).
Key Lock Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Manual Transmission Shift Linkage
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Service and Maintenance
Usage
11-19
Fluid/Lubricant
Clutch Linkage Pivot Points
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Floor Shift Linkage
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2 Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
11-20
Service and Maintenance
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
11-21
11-22
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Customer Information
Customer
Information
Courtesy Transportation ...12-10
Collision Damage
Repair ...........................12-11
Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure .......................12-1
Online Owner Center ........12-3
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ..............................12-4
Customer Assistance
Offices ............................12-4
GM Mobility
Reimbursement
Program ..........................12-5
Roadside Assistance
Program ..........................12-5
Scheduling Service
Appointments
(for Service) .....................12-8
Scheduling Service
Appointments (for Vehicle
Customization) .................12-8
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government ...................12-15
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government ...................12-15
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors .........12-16
Service Publications
Ordering Information ......12-16
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy ...................12-17
Event Data Recorders .....12-17
OnStar® ..........................12-18
Navigation System ...........12-18
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) .......12-18
12-1
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Pontiac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle will
be resolved by the dealer’s sales or
service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has
not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps
should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service, or
parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general
manager.
12-2
Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., call the
Pontiac Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-762-2737. In
Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free
number in order to give your inquiry
prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the
Customer Assistance
Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). This is available from the
vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present
mileage.
When contacting Pontiac, remember
that your concern will likely be
resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first.
heard within 40 days. If you do not
agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it
and proceed with any other venue
for relief available to you.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:
Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied
with your new vehicle. However, if
you continue to remain unsatisfied
after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two,
you can file with the BBB Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You can contact the BBB Auto Line
Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them at
the following address:
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out of court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although
you may be required to resort to
this informal dispute resolution
program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge
and your case will generally be
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
Customer Information
STEP THREE — Canadian
Owners: In the event that you do
not feel your concerns have
been addressed after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of
its participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding
arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle
service claims. The program
provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third
party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so
that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file
your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
approximately 70 days. We believe
our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
the General Motors Customer
Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French), or
write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
12-3
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
The Owner Center is a resource
for your GM ownership needs.
Specific vehicle information can be
found in one place.
The Online Owner Center
allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your
specific vehicle, including tips
and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s
service history and maintenance
schedule.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for
service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and
privileges only available to
members.
Refer to MyGMLink.com on the web
for updated information and to
register your vehicle.
12-4
Customer Information
My GM Canada (Canada only)
My GM Canada is a
password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can
save information on GM vehicles,
get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with
greater ease.
Here are a few of the valuable
tools and services you will have
access to:
• My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save
details such as address and
phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or
Retailers.
• My Driveway: Receive service
reminders and helpful advice
on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
• My Preferences: Manage your
profile, subscribe to E-News
and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada,
visit the My GM Canada section
within gmcanada.com.
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Pontiac has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance
Center. Any TTY user in the U.S.
can communicate with Pontiac
by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668).
(TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance
Offices
Pontiac encourages customers
to call the toll-free number for
assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Pontiac,
the letter should be addressed to:
United States — Customer
Assistance
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.Pontiac.com
1-800-762-2737 or
1-800-833-7668
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Customer Information
Canada — Customer
Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer
Assistance
Mexico, Central America
and Caribbean Islands/
Countries (Except Puerto
Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico,
S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma #2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility
Reimbursement Program
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit.
This program, available to qualified
applicants, can reimburse you
up to $1,000 of the cost of
eligible aftermarket adaptive
equipment required for your
vehicle, such as hand controls
or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
12-5
The offer is available for a very
limited period of time from the
date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine
your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the
GM Mobility Assistance Center at
1-800-323-9935. Text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada
also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance
Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call
1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743);
(Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
For Canadian purchased vehicles,
call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
12-6
Customer Information
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information ready:
• Your name, home address, and
home telephone number
• Telephone number of your
location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
Coverage
Services are provided up to
5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Pontiac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Pontiac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an owner
or driver if they decide the claims are
made too often, or the same type of
claim is made many times.
Services Provided
• Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is
provided to unlock the vehicle if
you are locked out. A remote
unlock may be available if you
have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present
identification before this service
is given.
• Emergency Tow From a Public
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Pontiac dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in sand,
mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is
provided to change a flat tire with
the spare tire. The spare tire,
if equipped, must be in good
condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner’s responsibility for
the repair or replacement of the
tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is
provided to jump start a dead
battery.
Customer Information
• Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: If your trip is
interrupted due to a warranty
failure, incidental expenses
may be reimbursed during the
5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km) Powertrain warranty
period. Items considered are
hotel, meals, and rental car.
Services Not Included in
Roadside Assistance
• Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains,
or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is
approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed
maps of North America are
provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
most scenic route. There is a
limit of six requests per year.
Additional travel information is
also available. Allow three weeks
for delivery.
12-7
• Trip Interruption Benefits
and Assistance: Must be over
250 kilometres from where your
trip was started to qualify.
General Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization,
original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received,
the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive
payment.
• Alternative Service:
If assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may give you
permission to get local emergency
road service. You will receive
payment, up to $100, after
sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical
failures may be covered, however
any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the
warranty are the owner
responsibility.
12-8
Customer Information
Scheduling Service
Appointments
(for Service)
Scheduling Service
Appointments (for
Vehicle Customization)
When your vehicle requires warranty
service, contact your dealer/retailer
and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment
and advising your service consultant
of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize
your inconvenience.
Your vehicle may have lighting and
door lock features that can be
programmed to your preference.
You will need to schedule an
appointment with your dealer/retailer
if you would like to change the
way these features are currently
programmed. The following is a list
of the features that can be
programmed. See your
dealer/retailer to change the
programming of these features:
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it
can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call
your dealership/retailer, let them
know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests
you to bring the vehicle for service,
you are urged to do so as early
in the work day as possible to allow
for the same day repair.
Driver Door Key Unlock Switch:
If this feature is programmed on,
all of the doors will unlock when the
key is turned twice in the driver’s
door lock cylinder. When the vehicle
left the factory this feature was
programmed on.
Courtesy Lamp Timer: This
feature allows for changing how
long the courtesy lamps stay
on when all the doors and liftgate
are closed and the key is out of
the ignition, in LOCK/OFF, or
in ACC/ACCESSORY. When the
vehicle left the factory the courtesy
lamps were programmed to stay
on for 15 seconds. This can
be changed to 7.5 seconds or
30 seconds.
Interior Lamps when Ignition
Off: If this feature is programmed
on, the interior lamps will come on
when the ignition is turned off
when it is dark outside. When the
vehicle left the factory this
feature was programmed on.
Customer Information
Interior Lamps on with Door
Key Unlock: If this feature is
programmed on, the interior lamps
will come on when the doors are
unlocked when it is dark outside.
When the vehicle left the factory this
feature was programmed on.
RFA All Unlock Enable: If this
feature is programmed on, pressing
the RKE unlock button twice
within three seconds will unlock all
of the doors. When the vehicle
left the factory this feature
was programmed on.
Key Fob Signal: If this feature is
programmed on, the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
can be used to lock and unlock
the vehicle. When the vehicle left
the factory this feature was
programmed on.
Remote Panic Command: If this
feature is programmed on, pressing
and holding the RKE panic button
will cause the horn to sound and the
lights to flash. When the vehicle
left the factory this feature was
programmed on.
RFA Visual Feedback: If this
feature is programmed on,
the hazard lights will flash when you
lock and unlock the vehicle with
the RKE transmitter. When the
vehicle left the factory this feature
was programmed on.
Automatic Door Locking: If this
feature is programmed on, the doors
will automatically lock when the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) or
when the vehicle speed is greater
than 8 mph (13 km/h).
12-9
Automatic Door Unlocking: If this
feature is programmed on, the doors
will automatically unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into P (Park) or
when the ignition is turned off.
All Door Unlock Command: If this
feature is programmed on, the doors
will all unlock when the driver’s door
is opened.
Lock-out Timer: This feature allows
for changing how long of a delay
there is before all of the doors lock
when pressing the lock button on the
RKE transmitter. When the vehicle
left the factory the delay was set for
1 minute. This can be changed to
30 seconds or 2 minutes.
12-10
Customer Information
Courtesy Transportation
Transportation Options
To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the Bumper
to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended
powertrain warranty in both the
U.S. and Canada.
Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
if you are unable to wait, GM helps to
minimize your inconvenience by
providing several transportation
options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can
offer you one of the following:
Several courtesy transportation
options are available to assist
in reducing your inconvenience
when warranty repairs are required.
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
Transportation. Dealers may provide
you with shuttle service to get you
to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule.
This includes one-way or round
trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of
the dealer’s area.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information”
furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Shuttle Service
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the
dealer’s shuttle service, the expense
must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the
maximum amount allowed by GM
for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or
relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be
available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your
dealer for information regarding
the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other
transportation costs.
Customer Information
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept
for an overnight warranty repair.
Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original
receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card,
etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of
the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like-vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program
Information
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact
your dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate
dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right
to unilaterally modify, change
or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to
resolve all questions of claim
eligibility pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein at
its sole discretion.
12-11
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have
the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can
be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are
new parts made with the same
materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle
was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle’s
designed appearance, durability, and
safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain
your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
12-12
Customer Information
Recycled original equipment parts
may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to
maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also
available. These are made by
companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your
vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in
subsequent collisions. Aftermarket
parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
and any vehicle failure related to
such parts are not covered by that
warranty.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose
a collision repair facility that
meets your needs before you
ever need collision repairs.
Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with
GM-trained technicians and state of
the art equipment, or be able to
recommend a collision repair center
that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your
GM vehicle with comprehensive
and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences
in the quality of coverage afforded
by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation
for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts.
Some insurance companies will not
specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance,
we recommend that you assure
your vehicle will be repaired with
GM original equipment collision
parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to
have insurance that assures
repairs with Genuine GM Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer
replacement parts. Read your lease
carefully, as you may be charged
at the end of your lease for
poor quality repairs.
Customer Information
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are
involved in a crash.
• Check to make sure that you are
all right. If you are uninjured,
make sure that no one else in
your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help.
Do not leave the scene of a crash
until all matters have been taken
care of. Move your vehicle only if
its position puts you in danger or
you are instructed to move it by a
police officer.
• Give only the necessary and
requested information to police
and other parties involved in the
crash. Do not discuss your
personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to
the crash. This will help guard
against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance,
call GM Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 12-5 for more
information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven,
know where the towing service
will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write
down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the
phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your
vehicle before it is towed away.
Make sure this includes your
insurance information and
registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information
you will need from the other
driver. Things like name, address,
phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license
12-13
plate, vehicle make, model and
model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance
company and policy number, and
a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance
company from the scene of the
crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need.
If they ask for a police report,
phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next
day and you can get a copy of the
report for a nominal fee. In some
states/provinces with “no fault”
insurance laws, a report may not
be necessary. This is especially
true if there are no injuries and
both vehicles are driveable.
12-14
Customer Information
• Choose a reputable collision
repair facility for your vehicle.
Whether you select a dealer/
retailer or a private collision repair
facility to fix the damage, make
sure you are comfortable with
them. Remember, you will have to
feel comfortable with their work for
a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read
it carefully and make sure you
understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you
have a question, ask for an
explanation. Reputable shops
welcome this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle
requires damage repairs, GM
recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a
pre-determined repair facility
of choice, take your vehicle there,
or have it towed there. Specify to
the facility that any required
replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered
by your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts.
Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine
GM parts. Remember if your
vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept
a repair valuation based on
that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have
no contractual limits with that
company. In such cases, you can
have control of the repair and
parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
Customer Information
Reporting Safety
Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you,
your dealer/retailer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
12-15
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that your vehicle has
a safety defect, notify Transport
Canada immediately, in addition
to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
12-16
Customer Information
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
Service Publications
Ordering Information
The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
In addition to notifying NHTSA
(or Transport Canada) in a
situation like this, please notify
General Motors.
Service Manuals
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.
Call 1-800-762-2737, or write:
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on engines,
transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and service
of your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model
Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, specify
year and model name of the vehicle.
Customer Information
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover),
visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide
Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change
without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers:
All listed prices are quoted in
U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in
U.S. funds.
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven.
For example, your vehicle uses
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash and, if
so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control
the vehicle. These modules may
store data to help your dealer/retailer
technician service your vehicle.
Some modules may also store data
about how you operate the vehicle,
such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules
may also retain the owner’s personal
preferences, such as radio pre-sets,
seat positions, and temperature
settings.
12-17
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how
a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was
pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was
traveling
12-18
Customer Information
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) is
recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement,
that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request of police or
similar government office; as part of
GM’s defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to
a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you
subscribe to the OnStar services,
please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data
collection and use.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation
system, use of the system may result
in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and
other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and for
deletion instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as
tire pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences such
as key fobs for remote door
locking/unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with
any other GM system containing
personal information.
INDEX
A
Accessories and
Modifications ...................... 9-3
Accessory Power Outlets ........ 4-9
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-34
Additives, Fuel ..................... 8-37
Add-On Electrical
Equipment ....................... 9-35
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ....... 9-12
Air Conditioning ..................... 7-1
Airbag
Passenger Status
Indicator ....................... 4-15
Readiness Light ................ 4-14
System, Replacing Parts
After a Crash ................ 1-35
Airbag System ..................... 1-21
Adding Equipment to
Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ........................ 1-34
Check ............................. 1-35
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? ..................... 1-26
Airbag System (cont.)
Passenger Sensing
System ........................
Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ........................
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? ........................
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates? ........
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? ........................
Where Are the Airbags? .....
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD)
System ...........................
All-Wheel-Drive Service
Light ...............................
Antenna, Fixed Mast ............
Antenna, XM™ Satellite
Radio Antenna System ......
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) ..................
Antilock Brake, System
Warning Light ...................
1-28
1-33
1-26
1-26
1-24
1-23
8-22
4-24
6-14
6-14
8-20
4-18
i-1
Appearance Care
Chemical Paint Spotting ..... 9-90
Exterior Cleaning .............. 9-86
Finish Damage ................. 9-89
Interior Cleaning ............... 9-83
Sheet Metal Damage ........ 9-89
Underbody Maintenance .... 9-90
Appointments, Scheduling
Service ........................... 12-8
Ashtray(s) ........................... 4-10
Audio System ........................ 6-1
Audio Steering Wheel
Controls ....................... 6-13
Fixed Mast Antenna .......... 6-14
Radio Reception ............... 6-14
Setting the Clock ................ 6-2
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System ............ 6-14
Audio System(s) .................... 6-3
Automatic Headlamp System ... 5-2
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ............................... 9-14
Operation .................... 8-6, 8-8
i-2
INDEX
B
Battery ............................... 9-30
Run-Down Protection .......... 5-4
Brake
System Inspection ........... 11-17
Brake Fluid ......................... 9-27
Brakes ............................... 9-27
System Warning Light ....... 4-17
Braking ............................... 8-19
Break-In, New Vehicle ............ 8-2
Bulb Replacement ................ 9-31
Halogen Bulbs .................. 9-31
Headlamp Aiming .............. 9-30
Headlamps and Parking
Lamps ......................... 9-31
License Plate Lamps ......... 9-34
Replacement Bulbs ........... 9-35
Taillamps ......................... 9-33
Buying New Tires ................. 9-54
C
California Fuel ..................... 8-36
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements ....... 9-3
California Proposition
65 Warning ........................ 9-3
Canadian Owners ..................... ii
Capacities and
Specifications ................... 10-2
Carbon Monoxide ......... 8-16, 8-29
Care, Safety Belts ................ 1-20
Cargo Cover ......................... 3-4
Cargo Management System .... 3-6
Cargo Tie Downs ................... 3-6
Cautions and Notices ............... iii
CD, MP3 .............................. 6-9
Center Console Storage Area ... 3-2
Chains, Tire ........................ 9-60
Charging System Light .......... 4-16
Check
Engine Lamp ................... 4-20
Chemical Paint Spotting ........ 9-90
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ..... 1-41
Infants and Young
Children ....................... 1-38
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children .................. 1-44
Older Children .................. 1-36
Securing .................. 1-50, 1-53
Where to Put the
Restraint ...................... 1-43
Cleaning
Exterior ........................... 9-86
Interior ............................ 9-83
Underbody Maintenance .... 9-90
Climate Control System .......... 7-1
Air Filter, Passenger
Compartment .................. 7-4
Outlet Adjustment ............... 7-3
Clock, Setting ........................ 6-2
Clutch, Hydraulic .................. 9-17
Collision Damage Repair ..... 12-11
Compact Spare Tire ............. 9-70
Content Theft-Deterrent ......... 2-10
Control of a Vehicle .............. 8-18
Coolant
Engine ............................ 9-18
Engine
Temperature Gage ......... 4-19
Cooling System ................... 9-18
Cruise Control ....................... 4-4
Cruise Control Light .............. 4-23
Cupholders ........................... 3-1
Customer Assistance
Information
Courtesy
Transportation ..... 12-4, 12-10
Customer Assistance
Offices ......................... 12-4
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure .................... 12-1
INDEX
Customer Assistance Information
(cont.)
GM Mobility
Reimbursement
Program ....................... 12-5
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors ........ 12-16
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government ................ 12-15
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government ................ 12-15
Roadside Assistance
Program ....................... 12-5
Service Publications
Ordering Information ..... 12-16
D
Daytime Running Lamp .......... 5-2
Defensive Driving ................. 8-17
Disc, MP3 ............................ 6-9
Doing Your Own
Service Work ..................... 9-4
Dome Lamps ........................ 5-3
Door
Ajar Light ........................ 4-24
Locks ............................... 2-6
Power Door Locks .............. 2-7
Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-7
Driver Storage Compartment .... 3-3
Driving
At Night .......................... 8-26
Before a Long Trip ............ 8-28
Defensive ........................ 8-17
Drunken .......................... 8-18
Highway Hypnosis ............ 8-28
Hill and Mountain Roads .... 8-28
In Rain and on Wet
Roads ......................... 8-27
Rocking Your Vehicle to
Get it Out .................... 8-31
Winter ............................. 8-29
E
EDR ................................. 12-17
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ............ 9-35
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block ................... 9-39
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers ...................... 9-36
i-3
Electrical System (cont.)
Headlamp Wiring .............. 9-35
Instrument Panel
Fuse Block ................... 9-36
Power Windows and
Other Power Options ..... 9-36
Windshield Wiper Fuses .... 9-36
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ............... 9-12
Check and Service Engine
Soon Lamp .................. 4-20
Coolant ........................... 9-18
Coolant Heater ................... 8-5
Coolant
Temperature Gage ......... 4-19
Cooling System
Inspection ................... 11-17
Drive Belt Routing ............. 10-5
Engine Compartment
Overview ....................... 9-6
Exhaust ........................... 8-16
Oil ................................... 9-9
Overheating ..................... 9-22
Starting ............................. 8-4
Entry Lighting ........................ 5-3
Event Data Recorders ......... 12-17
Extender, Safety Belt ............ 1-19
Exterior Lamps ...................... 5-1
i-4
INDEX
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ............ 9-12
Finish Damage .................... 9-89
Fixed Mast Antenna ............. 6-14
Flashers, Hazard Warning ....... 4-3
Flash-to-Pass ........................ 4-7
Flat Tire .............................. 9-61
Flat Tire, Changing ............... 9-62
Flat Tire, Storing .................. 9-68
Floor Mats ............................ 3-3
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ..... 9-14
Power Steering ................. 9-24
Windshield Washer ........... 9-24
Fog Lamp
Fog .................................. 5-2
Fog Lamp Light ................... 4-23
Folding Seatback, Passenger ... 1-4
Fuel ................................... 8-36
Additives ......................... 8-37
California Fuel .................. 8-36
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container ..................... 8-40
Filling the Tank ................. 8-38
Fuels in Foreign
Countries ..................... 8-37
Gage .............................. 4-24
Fuel (cont.)
Gasoline Octane ............... 8-36
Gasoline Specifications ...... 8-36
Low Warning Light ............ 4-25
System Inspection ........... 11-16
Fuses
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block ................... 9-39
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers ...................... 9-36
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block ........................... 9-36
Windshield Wiper .............. 9-36
G
Gage
Engine Coolant
Temperature ................. 4-19
Fuel ................................ 4-24
Speedometer ................... 4-13
Tachometer ...................... 4-13
Gasoline
Octane ............................ 8-36
Specifications ................... 8-36
Glove Box ............................ 3-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program .......................... 12-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 4-3
Head Restraints ..................... 1-6
Headlamp
Aiming ............................ 9-30
Headlamp Wiring ................. 9-35
Headlamps
Bulb Replacement ............. 9-31
Daytime Running Lamp ....... 5-2
Exterior Lamps ................... 5-1
Flash-to-Pass ..................... 4-7
Halogen Bulbs .................. 9-31
Headlamps and Parking
Lamps ......................... 9-31
High/Low Beam Changer ..... 4-7
Heater ................................. 7-1
Engine Coolant .................. 8-5
Height Adjuster, Seat .............. 1-2
Highbeam On Light .............. 4-24
Highway Hypnosis ................ 8-28
Hill and Mountain Roads ....... 8-28
Hood
Release ............................ 9-5
Hooks .................................. 3-3
Horn .................................... 4-3
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly .......................... 1-11
Hydraulic Clutch ................... 9-17
INDEX
I
K
Ignition Positions ................... 8-2
Immobilizer ........................... 2-9
Immobilizer Operation ............. 2-9
Infants and Young Children,
Restraints ........................ 1-38
Inflation - Tire Pressure ......... 9-47
Inspection
Brake System ................. 11-17
Engine Cooling System .... 11-17
Exhaust System .............. 11-16
Fuel System ................... 11-16
Part C - Periodic
Maintenance ............... 11-16
Steering, Suspension and
Front Drive Axle Boot
and Seal .................... 11-16
Throttle System .............. 11-17
Instrument Panel
Brightness ......................... 5-3
Cluster ............................ 4-12
Overview ........................... 4-2
Keyless Entry System ............ 2-3
Keys .................................... 2-2
J
Jump Starting ...................... 9-71
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .......... 9-42
Lamp
Malfunction Indicator ......... 4-20
Lamps
Dome ............................... 5-3
Reading ............................ 5-4
Lap-Shoulder Belt ................ 1-16
LATCH System
Replacing Parts After a
Crash .......................... 1-49
LATCH System for Child
Restraints ........................ 1-44
License Plate Lamps ............ 9-34
Liftgate
Carbon Monoxide ............... 2-8
Light
Airbag Readiness ............. 4-14
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning .............. 4-18
Brake System Warning ...... 4-17
Charging System .............. 4-16
i-5
Light (cont.)
Cruise Control .................. 4-23
Door Ajar ......................... 4-24
Fog Lamp ........................ 4-23
Highbeam On ................... 4-24
Lights On Reminder .......... 4-23
Low Fuel Warning ............. 4-25
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light ............... 4-18
Low Washer Fluid
Warning ....................... 4-23
Oil Pressure ..................... 4-22
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator ....................... 4-15
Safety Belt Reminders ....... 4-14
Security ........................... 4-22
Service All-Wheel-Drive ...... 4-24
Speed Sensitive Power
Steering (SSPS)
Warning Light ............... 4-18
StabiliTrak® Indicator ......... 4-19
Taillamp Indicator .............. 4-23
TCS Warning Light ........... 4-19
Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning .............. 4-19
Lighting
Entry ................................ 5-3
i-6
INDEX
Lights
Exterior Lamps ................... 5-1
Flash-to-Pass ..................... 4-7
High/Low Beam Changer ..... 4-7
Loading Your Vehicle ............ 8-32
Locks
Door ................................. 2-6
Power Door ....................... 2-7
Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-7
Loss of Control .................... 8-25
Low Fuel Warning Light ........ 4-25
Low Washer Fluid Warning
Light ............................... 4-23
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children ...................... 1-44
Luggage Carrier .................... 3-2
M
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill .............
At Least Once a Month ...
At Least Once a Year ......
At Least Twice a Year .....
Brake System
Inspection ...................
Engine Cooling System
Inspection ...................
11-12
11-13
11-13
11-13
11-17
11-17
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Exhaust System
Inspection ................... 11-16
Fuel System Inspection .... 11-16
How This Section is
Organized .................... 11-2
Introduction ...................... 11-1
Maintenance Replacement
Parts ........................... 10-4
Maintenance
Requirements ............... 11-2
Part A - Scheduled
Maintenance Services .... 11-3
Part B - Owner Checks
and Services ............... 11-12
Part C - Periodic
Maintenance
Inspections ................. 11-16
Part D - Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants ... 11-18
Part E - Maintenance
Record ....................... 11-20
Scheduled Maintenance ..... 11-4
Steering, Suspension and
Front Drive Axle Boot
and Seal Inspection ..... 11-16
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Throttle System
Inspection ................... 11-17
Using .............................. 11-3
Your Vehicle and the
Environment ................. 11-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 4-20
Manual Seats ........................ 1-2
Manual Transmission
Fluid ............................... 9-16
Operation ........................ 8-11
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ..... 2-13
Outside Power Mirrors ....... 2-14
MP3 .................................... 6-9
MyGMLink.com .................... 12-3
N
Navigation System,
Privacy .......................... 12-18
New Vehicle Break-In ............. 8-2
Notices and Cautions ............... iii
Notification
Service Airbag Message .... 4-16
INDEX
O
Odometer ........................... 4-13
Odometers, Trip ................... 4-13
Off-Road Recovery ............... 8-24
Oil
Engine .............................. 9-9
Pressure Light .................. 4-22
Older Children, Restraints ...... 1-36
Online Owner Center ............ 12-3
OnStar, Privacy .................. 12-18
OnStar® System, see
OnStar® Manual ............... 4-25
Outlet Adjustment .................. 7-3
Outlets
Accessory Power ................ 4-9
Outside
Power Mirrors .................. 2-14
Overhead Console ................. 3-2
Owner Checks, Service .......... 9-5
Owners, Canadian .................... ii
P
Paint, Damage .....................
Park
Shifting Into .....................
Shifting Out of ..................
Park Brake ..........................
9-89
8-13
8-14
8-12
Parking
Over Things That Burn ...... 8-16
Parking Your Vehicle ............ 8-15
Part A - Scheduled
Maintenance Services ........ 11-3
Part B - Owner Checks
and Services .................. 11-12
Part C - Periodic Maintenance
Inspections ..................... 11-16
Part D - Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants ...... 11-18
Part E - Maintenance
Record .......................... 11-20
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator .......................... 4-15
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter ............................ 7-4
Passenger Sensing System ... 1-28
Passing .............................. 8-25
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California ...... 9-3
Personalization, Vehicle ......... 12-8
Power
Door Locks ........................ 2-7
Electrical System .............. 9-36
Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current ........................ 4-10
Retained Accessory ............ 8-4
Steering Fluid ................... 9-24
Windows ......................... 2-12
i-7
Power (cont.)
Pressure Cap ...................... 9-22
Privacy ............................. 12-17
Event Data Recorders ..... 12-17
Navigation System .......... 12-18
OnStar .......................... 12-18
Radio Frequency
Identification ................ 12-18
R
Radio Frequency Identification
(RFID), Privacy ............... 12-18
Radio(s) ............................... 6-3
Radios
Reception ........................ 6-14
Setting the Clock ................ 6-2
Reading Lamps ..................... 5-4
Rear Door Security Locks ....... 2-7
Rear Seat Operation .............. 1-7
Rear Windshield Washer/
Wiper ............................... 4-8
Rearview Mirrors .................. 2-13
Reclining Seatbacks ............... 1-3
Recreational Vehicle Towing ... 9-75
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System ............................. 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System, Operation .............. 2-4
i-8
INDEX
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire ..... 9-64
Removing the Spare Tire
and Tools ........................ 9-63
Replacement Bulbs .............. 9-35
Replacement Parts,
Maintenance .................... 10-4
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash ........... 1-49
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ..... 12-15
General Motors ............... 12-16
United States
Government ................ 12-15
Restraint System Check
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash ........ 1-35
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash .......................... 1-20
Retained Accessory Power ...... 8-4
Roadside
Assistance Program .......... 12-5
Rocking Your Vehicle to
Get it Out ........................ 8-31
Routing, Engine Drive Belt .... 10-5
Running the Vehicle While
Parked ............................ 8-17
S
Safety Belt Reminders .......... 4-14
Safety Belts .......................... 1-8
Care of ........................... 1-20
Check ............................. 1-20
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly ....................... 1-11
Lap-Shoulder Belt ............. 1-16
Replacing Parts After a
Crash .......................... 1-20
Safety Belt Extender ......... 1-19
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy .................... 1-19
Scheduled Maintenance ........ 11-4
Seatback, Folding Passenger ... 1-4
Seats
Head Restraints ................. 1-6
Height Adjuster .................. 1-2
Passenger Folding
Seatback ....................... 1-4
Rear Seat Operation ........... 1-7
Reclining Seatbacks ............ 1-3
Securing Child
Restraints ................ 1-50, 1-53
Security Light ...................... 4-22
Service ................................ 9-2
Accessories and
Modifications .................. 9-3
Adding Equipment to the
Outside of the Vehicle ..... 9-4
All-Wheel-Drive Light ......... 4-24
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements .... 9-3
California Proposition
65 Warning .................... 9-3
Doing Your Own Work ........ 9-4
Engine Soon Lamp ........... 4-20
Owner Checks ................... 9-5
Publications Ordering
Information ................. 12-16
Service Airbag Notification
System Message .............. 4-16
Service, Scheduling
Appointments ................... 12-8
Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-33
Setting the Clock ................... 6-2
Sheet Metal Damage ............ 9-89
Shifting Into Park ................. 8-13
Shifting Out of Park .............. 8-14
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change ..................... 4-7
INDEX
Spare Tire
Compact ......................... 9-70
Installing .......................... 9-64
Removing ........................ 9-63
Storing ............................ 9-68
Specifications, Capacities ...... 10-2
Speed Sensitive Power
Steering (SSPS)
Warning Light ................... 4-18
Speedometer ....................... 4-13
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..... 4-19
Stabilitrak® System ............... 8-22
Starting the Engine ................ 8-4
Steering .............................. 8-23
Steering, Suspension and
Front Drive Axle Boot and
Seal Inspection ............... 11-16
Steering Wheel Controls,
Audio .............................. 6-13
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ...... 4-4
Storage Areas
Cargo Management
System .......................... 3-6
Center Console
Storage Area .................. 3-2
Cupholders ........................ 3-1
Driver Storage
Compartment .................. 3-3
Glove Box ......................... 3-1
Storage Areas (cont.)
Luggage Carrier ................. 3-2
Overhead Console .............. 3-2
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or
Snow .............................. 8-31
Sun Visors .......................... 2-13
Sunroof .............................. 2-14
T
Tachometer ......................... 4-13
Taillamp Indicator Light ......... 4-23
Taillamps ............................ 9-33
TCS Warning Light ............... 4-19
Theft-Deterrent Systems ......... 2-9
Content Theft-Deterrent ..... 2-10
Immobilizer ........................ 2-9
Immobilizer Operation ......... 2-9
Throttle System Inspection ... 11-17
Tilt Wheel ............................. 4-4
Time, Setting ......................... 6-2
Tires .................................. 9-41
Buying New Tires ............. 9-54
Chains ............................ 9-60
Changing a Flat Tire ......... 9-62
Compact Spare Tire .......... 9-70
Different Size ................... 9-56
Tires (cont.)
If a Tire Goes Flat ............
Inflation - Tire Pressure .....
Inspection and Rotation .....
Installing the Spare Tire .....
Pressure Monitor
Operation .....................
Pressure Monitor System ...
Removing the Flat Tire ......
Removing the Spare Tire
and Tools .....................
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools .....................
Tire Sidewall Labeling .......
Tire Terminology and
Definitions ....................
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading .......................
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance .......................
Wheel Replacement ..........
When It Is Time for
New Tires ....................
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..........
Towing a Trailer ................
Your Vehicle .....................
i-9
9-61
9-47
9-53
9-64
9-50
9-48
9-64
9-63
9-68
9-42
9-44
9-56
9-58
9-59
9-54
9-75
9-77
9-75
i-10
INDEX
Traction
Control System (TCS) ....... 8-21
Control System Warning
Light ............................ 4-19
Stabilitrak® System ........... 8-22
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ................ 9-14
Fluid, Manual ................... 9-16
Transmission Operation,
Automatic ................... 8-6, 8-8
Transmission Operation,
Manual ............................ 8-11
Trip Odometers .................... 4-13
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals ............................. 4-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever ................................ 4-4
U
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading ........................... 9-56
V
Vehicle
Control ............................ 8-18
Loading ........................... 8-32
Parking Your .................... 8-15
Personalization ................. 12-8
Running While Parked ....... 8-17
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy .......................... 12-17
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ................... 10-1
Service Parts Identification
Label ........................... 10-1
Ventilation Adjustment ............. 7-3
Visors ................................. 2-13
W
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators ........................ 4-11
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers .... 4-3
Washer Fluid, Low Warning
Light ............................... 4-23
Wheels
Alignment and
Tire Balance ................. 9-58
Different Size ................... 9-56
Wheels (cont.)
Replacement .................... 9-59
Where to Put the Restraint .... 1-43
Windows ............................. 2-12
Power ............................. 2-12
Windshield
Washer ............................. 4-8
Washer Fluid .................... 9-24
Wiper Blade
Replacement ................ 9-25
Wiper Fuses .................... 9-36
Wipers .............................. 4-7
Windshield, Rear Washer/
Wiper ............................... 4-8
Winter Driving ...................... 8-29
X
XM Radio Messages ............ 6-12
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System ............... 6-14
Y
Your Vehicle and the
Environment ..................... 11-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement